Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 4wd
Engine and year
L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0560 - P0564,
( P0561 P0562 P0563 0560 0561 0562 0563 0564 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0562
P0560 - P0564: Testing and Inspection P0562
PCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
TCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0560 - P0564,
( P0561 P0562 P0563 0560 0561 0562 0563 0564 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0562 > Page 9
P0560 - P0564: Testing and Inspection P0563
PCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
TCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0A00-P0AZZ > P0A25 - P0A29,
( P0A26 P0A27 P0A28 0A25 0A26 0A27 0A28 0A29 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0A27
P0A25 - P0A29: Testing and Inspection P0A27
PCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
TBCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2800-P28ZZ > P2805 - P2809,
( P2806 P2807 P2808 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2806
P2805 - P2809: Testing and Inspection P2806
PCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
TCM
For diagnosis of all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 38
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 39
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 44
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 45
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 55
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 56
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 61
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 62
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 65
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 68
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 69
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 70
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 71
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 74
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 75
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 76
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 77
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 78
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 79
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 80
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 89
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 90
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 95
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 96
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 97
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 98
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 99
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 100
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 101
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 102
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 103
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 104
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 >
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 105
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 111
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 112
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 117
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 118
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 119
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 120
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 121
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 122
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 123
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 124
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 125
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 126
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 127
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 132
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency
Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 133
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 139
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency
Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact
Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade > Page 140
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD
Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 162
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global
Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 163
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 169
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 170
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 179
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 180
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 186
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 187
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 191
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 192
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 197
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 198
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 203
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 206
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 207
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 208
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 212
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 220
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 221
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 222
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 223
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump
Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay > Page 232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 237
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component
Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component
Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay > Page 244
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 251
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay
The A/C clutch relay (may be referred to as the wide open throttle (WOT) A/C cutoff relay) is wired
normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic
automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal
indicating that A/C is requested. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs
that are available. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the wide open throttle A/C
cut-off (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 > Mar > 11 > A/C - Poor
Cooling Performance
Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 > Mar > 11 >
A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 265
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 266
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 267
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: >
08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 289
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 290
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 298
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 302
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 310
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 311
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 312
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 313
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 316
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 317
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 318
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 319
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 320
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 321
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 322
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 325
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 326
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an
accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires two
wires).
- An internal spring is used to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is
typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control
Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize the fuel control while delivering the
requested torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 333
ECT System Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
a Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register
a concern.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 334
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions for additional DTC
information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
a Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 343
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
> Page 348
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 354
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 359
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
360
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
362
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
363
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
364
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
365
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
366
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
367
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
368
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
369
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the
VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing
PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to carry out this procedure correctly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio
out of Acceptable Range. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of
functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel
octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, and the presence of speed control. Only
items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan
tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Reprogramming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and
the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it is replaced.
Manual data entry must be carried out if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out
the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make certain
that all parameters are included. Failure to correctly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) or axle ratio, may result in codes
P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As Built data center for the information
needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM
cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact the
National Hotline or Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As Built data. Non-Ford
technicians, use the Motorcraft website at Motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft homepage, use the
search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
PCM Reprogramming
Note: After the PCM is successfully reprogrammed, clear any TCM DTCs that may have been
stored during reprogramming.
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 372
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal. Install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 380
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Fuel Pump (FP) control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 388
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 389
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 390
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 391
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 392
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 393
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 394
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 395
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 399
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 406
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 407
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 415
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 416
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 417
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 418
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 419
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 420
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 421
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 422
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 423
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 424
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 425
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 426
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 427
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 428
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 429
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 430
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 431
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 432
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 433
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 434
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 435
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 437
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 438
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 439
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 444
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 445
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 456
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 457
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 458
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 461
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 462
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 463
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 464
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 468
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 469
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 473
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 482
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 485
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 486
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 487
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 488
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior
Door Handle - Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 492
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 493
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 494
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 495
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 496
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 500
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 501
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 502
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 503
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 504
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 505
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 511
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 516
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 517
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 518
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Body
and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 523
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 524
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 525
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 526
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 530
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 539
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 545
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 546
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 547
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor
Block > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster
Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster
Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 555
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster
Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 556
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster vacuum sensor retainer ring and remove the vacuum sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 560
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 564
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 568
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 572
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 573
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 577
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 578
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Brake
Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Brake
Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 582
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 591
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 597
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 600
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 601
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 602
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 605
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 606
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 607
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 610
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 611
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 612
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 613
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 614
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 615
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 621
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 622
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 623
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Page 631
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 636
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster
Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster
Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 640
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 645
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 648
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 649
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 650
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 651
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine
Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 652
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 653
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 658
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 659
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 663
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 664
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 668
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 669
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 672
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 679
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 682
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET is connected to the dual automatic temperature control (DATC). Evaporator temperature
is transmitted to the PCM from the DATC through the controller area network (CAN).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 683
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Humidity Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Humidity Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 687
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. For refrigerant
containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that
would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Low Pressure Switch
The A/C low pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. This normally
closed switch opens when the refrigerant pressure drops below 152 kPa (22 psi). This results in the
A/C turning off, preventing the evaporator from freezing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 700
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 701
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 702
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 703
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 704
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 705
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 706
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 707
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 708
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 709
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 710
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 711
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 712
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 713
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 714
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 715
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 716
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 717
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 718
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 719
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 720
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 721
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Hybrid Battery Service Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 726
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Drive Coolant
Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 737
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 741
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 744
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 745
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 746
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 747
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 751
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 752
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 757
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 758
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 762
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 763
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 764
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 >
Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 778
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 779
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 780
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 787
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 791
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 794
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 795
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 796
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 797
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 801
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 802
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 803
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 804
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 808
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 812
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 813
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 814
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 821
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 825
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 826
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 827
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 831
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 832
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 833
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
837
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
838
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
839
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
840
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
841
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
845
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
846
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
847
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 852
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 853
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 854
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 855
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 856
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 857
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
861
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
865
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
866
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is integrated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. It is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying
resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to
the PCM corresponding to temperature.
A thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
the total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, and ignition timing.
Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 870
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 871
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 872
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 876
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 877
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to
the absolute pressure in the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor is part of the EGR system. The PCM uses information from the MAP, TP, MAF,
CHT and CKP sensors to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 878
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
3. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
4. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 887
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 893
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 896
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #12 > Page 899
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 900
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 903
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 904
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 912
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 913
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 917
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 918
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 919
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 926
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 927
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs,
the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which
opens the electrical contacts of the switch. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the
location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 928
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 936
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 937
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 938
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 942
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 943
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 944
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 945
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 946
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 954
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 955
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 956
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 965
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 966
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 967
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 968
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 969
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 970
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 971
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 972
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 973
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 976
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 977
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 978
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 979
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 980
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 981
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 984
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 985
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 990
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 993
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1000
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1003
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an
assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1004
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1005
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1006
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1007
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1008
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1009
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1010
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1011
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1012
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1013
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1017
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1018
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1028
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1035
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1036
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire
Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1053
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1054
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1055
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1058
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1059
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1060
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1061
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1064
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1065
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1066
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1067
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1068
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1069
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1074
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1075
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1076
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1077
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1078
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1082
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1083
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1084
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1085
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1086
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation
Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance
Weight, and Tire Inflation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1092
Alignment: Specifications Material
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1093
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint Deflection, Ride
Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 1094
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1097
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1098
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1099
Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1100
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1101
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1102
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1105
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1106
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1107
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1108
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
- Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1109
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing of Steering. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1114
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1115
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 1072 RPM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1123
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1132
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.08-1.18 mm (0.042-0.046 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1137
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1138
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1139
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1140
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1143
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1147
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Crank the engine as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1148
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake:.............................................................................................
.........................................................................................................0.25 mm (0.0095 in). exhaust:.....
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: intake:........................................................
.............................................................................................................................0.22-0.28 mm
(0.008-0.011 in). exhaust:.....................................................................................................................
..............................................................0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1152
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
Select the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
- NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter > Page 1158
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1161
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 1167
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
AIR DISTRIBUTION
NOTE: A cabin air filter is available as a dealer-installed accessory.
The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the right hand side of the cowl
panel grill, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
AIR DISTRIBUTION
NOTE: A cabin air filter is available as a dealer-installed accessory.
The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the right hand side of the cowl
panel grill, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Element
Oil Filter Element
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Loosen the oil filter drain plug.
3. Using a cup-style oil filter wrench, loosen the oil filter cover one turn.
4. Remove the oil filter drain plug and drain the engine oil from the oil filter and adapter.
- Remove and discard the oil filter drain plug O-ring seal.
5. Remove the oil filter cover and oil filter element.
- Discard the oil filter element.
- Remove and discard the oil filter cover O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Wipe clean the oil filter cover and mounting surface on the oil filter adapter.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the oil filter cover O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install a new oil filter cover O-ring seal.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the oil filter cover. Overtightening the oil filter cover may damage
the cover or O-ring seal and result in a
oil leak.
Install a new oil filter element and the oil filter cover.
- Using a cup-style oil wrench, tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the oil filter drain plug O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install a new oil filter drain plug O-ring seal.
5. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the oil filter drain plug. Overtightening the oil filter drain plug may
damage the drain plug, O-ring seal or
cover and result in a oil leak.
Install the oil filter drain plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1180
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid.
2. Remove the plug and the VCT system oil filter from the intake camshaft thrust cap.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1181
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil
Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1182
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1183
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1184
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure
(EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1185
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil
Filter Element > Page 1186
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor manifold bolt and disconnect the compressor manifold and tube
from the A/C compressor.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 evaporator outlet line fitting nuts.
- Discard the O-ring seals and gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1192
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1193
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1194
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1195
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1196
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1197
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1198
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the passenger zone valve nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
10. Detach the evaporator inlet line from the A/C line bracket.
11. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
13. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1199
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor manifold bolt and disconnect the compressor manifold and tube
from the A/C compressor.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 evaporator outlet line fitting nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1200
- Discard the O-ring seals and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1201
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1202
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1203
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1204
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the passenger zone valve nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
10. Detach the evaporator inlet line from the A/C line bracket.
11. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
13. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Front
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Front
Front Connection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1205
Intermediate Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1206
3. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator inlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and
disconnect the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary line dash panel bracket nut and detach the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE: The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation.
Remove the 2 auxiliary line bracket retainers and the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet
lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket seal and new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Rear
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Rear
Rear Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
NOTE: This vehicle is not equipped with an in-line Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) filter in the
auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1207
Intermediate Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1208
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
NOTE: The rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines are installed from the factory as
one-piece assemblies which must be cut for removal. Replacement lines must be installed if the
lines are cut. The replacement parts are supplied as separate kits containing multiple piece lines
for ease of installation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the 2 rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear fitting nuts and disconnect the
fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with factory lines, it is necessary to cut the rear auxiliary
evaporator outlet and inlet lines for removal.
If equipped, disconnect the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line tube-O fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten the 3/8-inch inlet line tube-O fitting to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- To install, tighten the 5/8-inch outlet line tube-O fitting to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and disconnect
the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line front bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE: The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation.
Remove the 2 rear auxiliary line bracket retainers and remove the lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1209
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the A/C line bracket.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new O-ring and new gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 1210
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
8. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... PM-1-C Ford Specification .............................................
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine coolant .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 7.4 qts (7.0L)
Motor/Electronics (M/E) Coolant ..........................................................................................................
......................................................... 3.7 qts. (3.5 L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1219
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with Bettering agent (yellow-colored)
Ford Part Number ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................
.................................................... WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1224
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - CVT: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacities
Transmission Fluid...............................................................................................................................
....................................................4.05L (4.28 quarts)*
Motor electronics cooling system.........................................................................................................
......................................................3.5L (3.7 quarts)**
* Note: Transmission filled for life. The correct transaxle fill level is to the bottom of the fill plug,
which is the upper plug.
** Note: Approximate dry fill capacity
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1229
Fluid - CVT: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name
- Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number
- XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification
- MERCON LV
Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may
cause internal transmission damage.
Ford Part Name
- Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
Ford Part Number
- VC-7-B (US) - CVC-7-A (Canada) - Or equivalent
Ford Specification
- WSS-M97B51-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 2.96 pints (1.4 liters)
NOTE: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1234
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
REAR AXLE Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N ..................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification ...............................................................................................
....................................................................................... WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40
Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 1243
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 1249
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 1255
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 1260
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1265
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1266
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1267
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1268
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1269
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 1275
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 1280
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1285
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1286
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1287
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1288
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software
Programming > Page 1289
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................
............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 1292
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type ................................................................................................................................................
SAE 75W-140 High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 5.0 qts. (4.73 L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1297
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name US
.......................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Canada
...................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
Ford Part Number US ..........................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ X0-5W20-QSP Canada ..............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... CX0-5W20-LSP12
Ford Specifications
.......................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering
This vehicle is equipped with a Electric Power Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1305
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1306
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1309
facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use
the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All
contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow
the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing .
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1310
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1311
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of
refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer's procedures and instructions.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction
accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and
any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system.
Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material.
These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers
can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use
on one vehicle only.
1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for
low-pressure flushing and are not
designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections
using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur.
NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the
end of this procedure.
Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2
halves of the fitting.
- Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
- Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush
and Purge Fitting Kit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1312
3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure
they do not interfere with other engine
compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments.
6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C
operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum.
Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly.
7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the
condenser to evaporator tube.
11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only.
12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
....................................325 ml (11 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1317
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
....................................325 ml (11 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1318
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a
small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed,
some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is
necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the
total system PAG oil capacity must be added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement
Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the
same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
(YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1319
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz),
pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or
equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour
85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new
A/C compressor.
Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley
2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml
(4 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from
the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0
ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or
receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV
have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading.
1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain
the oil into a clean measuring cup.
2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and
60 ml (2 fl oz).
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction
accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system
contamination and the A/C system has been flushed.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port.
2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during
system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity
specification, refer to the Specifications table.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the
PAG oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1320
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1325
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1326
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1327
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1328
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1329
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1330
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1331
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1336
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1337
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1338
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1339
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1340
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1341
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1342
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1343
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Locations Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1349
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1350
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1351
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1352
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1353
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1354
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1355
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1356
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1357
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1358
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1359
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1360
Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Application and ID Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1364
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1365
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1366
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1367
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1368
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1369
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1370
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1371
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1372
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1373
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1375
Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 1376
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1381
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1382
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1387
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1388
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1389
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1390
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1391
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1392
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1393
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1394
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1395
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1396
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Auxiliary Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 1416
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 1417
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 1418
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 1419
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1422
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1423
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1424
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1425
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1426
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1427
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1428
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1431
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1432
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1433
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled as International Standards
Organization (ISO) engine symbol.
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the key is in the ON or START position.
- The MIL remains on in the on/start mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster prove-out
for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: the PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC is set.
- the instrument cluster illuminates the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- If the MIL remains off during the bulb check, there is: an instrument cluster concern.
- an instrument cluster wiring concern.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For any MIL concern, refer to Symptom Charts, GO to Quick Test QT1 See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/QT : Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
Quick Test .
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change (approximately 10,000 miles
[16,000 km] or 12 months) perform the following.
1. Press the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE= XXX% HOLD RESET=NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed.
3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life start value is desired, press and
release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the
start value by 10 percent.
NOTE: Oil life start value of 100% equals 10,000 miles [16,000 km] or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 6,000 miles [9,600 km] and 219 days.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1450
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1451
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1457
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1458
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1463
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1464
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1465
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1466
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1467
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to.......................................
............................................................................................................................................................1
35 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1477
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1478
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1483
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1493
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The intake phase shifting (IPS) VCT system enables rotation of the intake camshaft relative to the
crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions.
The VCT system has several operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and
default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module
(PCM) determines the phase angle based on a constant angle, limited by engine oil temperature
and engine RPM. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on
engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced
engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved
torque.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), cylinder head temperature
(CHT), CMP, accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor (via requested torque), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating
conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the
camshaft position based on engine oil temperature and engine speed inputs. During cold start
emissions reduction mode, the camshaft position is determined via engine speed and estimates of
engine coolant temperature and catalyst temperature (estimated from other sensors already used
such as IAT/CHT/MAF/CKP). During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and accelerator pedal position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating oil temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met.
3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning.
4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the
flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 1500
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Crank the engine as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 1501
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Install the camshafts and bearing caps in their original location and orientation. Tighten the bearing
caps in the sequence shown in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten 1 turn at a time until tight. Stage 2:
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
............................................7 Nm (62 lb-in). Stage 3: Tighten to.........................................................
.............................................................................................................................16 Nm (142 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolts.......................................................................................................................
...........................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Camshaft: Procedures
Camshaft Journal To Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal
clearance.
Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions.
- Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter.
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play.
2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Camshaft Surface Inspection
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable
outside the contact area.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1513
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Lobe Lift
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Camshaft Runout
Camshaft Runout
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1514
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1515
Camshaft: Removal and Replacement
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts or crankshaft unless instructed to do so in this procedure.
Rotating the camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause
serious damage to the valves or pistons.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt.
3. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid.
4. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See:
Adjustments.
5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1516
6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
7. Remove the engine plug bolt.
8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the camshaft removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
9. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a standard 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front
cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1517
10. Remove the lower timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
11. Remove the upper timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
12. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only.
13. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to
collapse and create slack in the timing chain.
Installing the M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in) bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will lock the tensioner
arm in a retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust
camshaft gear.
Using a small pick tool, release the timing chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover
timing hole.
- Have an assistant rotate (using the flats of the camshaft) the exhaust camshaft clockwise to
collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger.
- Insert the M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in) bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner
arm in the retracted position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1518
14. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust
camshaft drive gear.
15. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
16. Remove the timing chain from the camshaft phaser and sprocket.
17. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1519
18. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the intake
camshaft.
Remove the intake camshaft from the engine.
- Loosen the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts, in the sequence shown, one turn at a time until all
tension is released from the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the intake camshaft.
19. Mark the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft for reference during installation.
20. Place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser and
sprocket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the
new parts.
Position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the bolt.
- Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the
bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
2. NOTICE: Install the intake camshaft with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the
Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed
without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position
as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or
installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and
pistons.
NOTE: Lubricate the intake camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the intake camshafts and bearing caps. Tighten the intake camshaft bearing caps in the
sequence shown in 3 stages:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1520
- Stage 1: Tighten the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts until finger tight.
- Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in).
3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
4. Install the timing chain on the camshaft phaser and sprocket.
5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing
sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to
install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft.
Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the
exhaust camshaft.
- Hand-tighten the bolt.
6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain.
Remove the M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in) bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the
tensioner arm.
7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the exhaust camshaft drive
gear bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1521
8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
11. Install the upper timing hole plug in the engine front cover.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower timing hole plug.
- Install the lower timing hole plug in the engine front cover. Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1522
13. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
14. Install the accessory drive belt.
15. Install the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid.
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Camshafts
Camshafts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1523
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts unless instructed to in this procedure. Rotating the
camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause serious damage
to the valves and pistons.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. NOTICE: Before removing the high voltage cables, the vehicle electrical system must be
completely shut down for at least 5 minutes to
allow for the high voltage capacitors to discharge.
Depower the vehicle High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) electrical system. For additional
information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Remove the degas bottle.
5. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
6. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
7. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See:
Adjustments.
8. Remove the RF wheel and tire.
9. Remove the accessory drivebelt.
10. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1524
11. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool
to prevent engine rotation can result in
engine damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
12. Remove the engine plug bolt.
13. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the camshaft removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
14. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a standard 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front
cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1525
15. Remove the lower front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
16. Remove the upper front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
17. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only.
18. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to
collapse and create slack in the timing chain.
Installing an M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in) bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will hold the tensioner
arm in a retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust
camshaft gear.
Using a small pick tool, unlock the chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover timing hole.
- Using the flats of the camshaft, have an assistant rotate the exhaust camshaft clockwise to
collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger.
- Insert an M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in) bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner
arm in the retracted position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1526
19. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
20. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and exhaust
camshaft drive gear.
21. Remove the timing chain from the camshaft phaser and sprocket.
22. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1527
23. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the
camshafts.
NOTE: Mark the location and orientation of each camshaft bearing cap.
Remove the camshafts from the engine.
- Loosen the camshaft bearing cap bolts, in sequence, one turn at a time until all tension is
released from the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the camshafts.
24. If removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket is necessary, mark the sprocket and camshaft
for reference during installation.
- If necessary, place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser
and sprocket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the
new parts.
If necessary, position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise and install the camshaft phaser and
sprocket and the bolt.
- Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the
bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
2. NOTICE: Install the camshafts with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the
Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed
without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position
as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or
installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and
pistons.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the camshafts and bearing caps in their original location and orientation. Tighten the bearing
caps in the sequence shown in 3 stages:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1528
- Stage 1: Tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts one turn at a time, until finger tight.
- Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in).
3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
4. Install the timing chain on the camshaft phaser and sprocket.
5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing
sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to
install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft.
Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the
exhaust camshaft.
- Hand-tighten the bolt.
6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain release.
Remove the M6 x 30 mm bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the tensioner arm.
7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool
to prevent engine rotation can result in
engine damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolt.
- Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1529
8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
11. Install the upper front cover timing hole plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower front cover timing hole plug.
- Install the plug and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1530
13. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
14. Install the accessory drivebelt.
15. Install the RF wheel and tire.
16. Install the VCT oil control solenoid.
17. Install the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
18. Install the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
19. Install the degas bottle.
20. Repower the vehicle HVTB electrical system. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Procedures
Valve Tappet Inspection
Valve Tappet Inspection
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Install new components as necessary.
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1535
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Removal and Replacement
Valve Tappets
Valve Tappets
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original
positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1536
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1541
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1545
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The intake phase shifting (IPS) VCT system enables rotation of the intake camshaft relative to the
crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions.
The VCT system has several operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and
default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module
(PCM) determines the phase angle based on a constant angle, limited by engine oil temperature
and engine RPM. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on
engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced
engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved
torque.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), cylinder head temperature
(CHT), CMP, accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor (via requested torque), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating
conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the
camshaft position based on engine oil temperature and engine speed inputs. During cold start
emissions reduction mode, the camshaft position is determined via engine speed and estimates of
engine coolant temperature and catalyst temperature (estimated from other sensors already used
such as IAT/CHT/MAF/CKP). During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and accelerator pedal position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating oil temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met.
3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning.
4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the
flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1550
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1554
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1558
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1562
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1563
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
Crankshaft End Play
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture.
2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
2.5L
3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
3. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components, or damage to the wiring
can occur.
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1567
4. Remove the block heater.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) (2.5L).
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) (3.0L).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to......................................................
.................................................................................................................................100 Nm (74 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten an additional..............................................................................................................
.......................................90 degrees (one-fourth turn).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RF wheel and tire.
3. Remove the accessory drive belt.
4. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1573
6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
7. Remove the engine plug bolt.
8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the crankshaft pulley removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
9. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during removal of
the pulley bolt or damage to the engine
can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft Damper
Holding Tool, and the bolt should be removed using an air impact wrench (1/2-in drive minimum).
NOTICE: The crankshaft sprocket diamond washer may come off with the crankshaft pulley. The
diamond washer must be replaced. Remove and discard the diamond washer. If the diamond
washer is not installed, engine damage may occur.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1574
Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in drive hand tool to hold the
crankshaft pulley. Use an air impact wrench to remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
- Remove the crankshaft pulley.
- Remove the diamond washer and discard.
Installation
1. Install a new diamond washer.
2. NOTE: Do not install the crankshaft pulley bolt at this time.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing.
Position the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft with the hole in the pulley at the 6 o'clock
position.
3. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
4. NOTE: The crankshaft must remain in the TDC position during installation of the pulley bolt or
damage to the engine can occur. Therefore, the
crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and the bolt
should be installed using hand tools only.
NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Install a new crankshaft pulley bolt. Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in
drive hand tool to hold the crankshaft pulley, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 100 Nm (74 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1575
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
6. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
7. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
8. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise one and three-fourths turns.
9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
10. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1576
11. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Using the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley.
- If it is not possible to install the bolt, the engine valve timing must be corrected by repeating this
procedure.
12. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate to check the position of the camshafts.
- If it is not possible to install the special tool, the engine valve timing must be corrected by
repeating this procedure.
13. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
14. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
15. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1577
16. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
17. Install the accessory drive belt.
18. Install the RF wheel and tire.
19. Install the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1578
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Pulley > Page 1579
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1583
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1584
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1588
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1589
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake:.............................................................................................
.........................................................................................................0.25 mm (0.0095 in). exhaust:.....
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: intake:........................................................
.............................................................................................................................0.22-0.28 mm
(0.008-0.011 in). exhaust:.....................................................................................................................
..............................................................0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1594
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
Select the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets
See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1602
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Valve Cover
Valve Cover (View 1 of 2)
Valve Cover (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1606
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
3. Disconnect the crankcase vent hose from the valve cover.
4. Remove the 4 engine cover studs.
5. Detach the 3 wire harness retainers from the valve cover stud bolts.
6. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
9. Remove the oil level indicator.
10. Remove the 14 valve cover retainers, the valve cover and gasket.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: The valve cover must be secured within 4 minutes of silicone gasket application. If the
valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the
sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the locations shown.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the gasket. Install a new gasket, if necessary.
Install the valve cover, gasket and retainers.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1607
4. Install the oil level indicator.
5. Connect the VCT solenoid electrical connector.
6. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
7. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.
8. Attach the 3 wire harness retainers to the valve cover stud bolts.
9. Install the 4 engine cover studs.
10. Connect the crankcase vent hose to the valve cover.
11. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide: Service and Repair
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into
the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if
necessary.
Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top,
middle and bottom of the valve guide.
2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer.
3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat Inspection
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
- Check valve angles.
- Check margin width.
- Be sure margin width is within specification.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if
abnormalities are found.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1615
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Width
Valve Seat Width
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification.
- Measure the intake valve seat width.
- Measure the exhaust valve seat width.
- Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve
springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1616
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Runout
Valve Seat Runout
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Valve Spring: Procedures
Valve Spring Installed Length
Valve Spring Installed Length
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Spring Free Length
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Squareness
Valve Spring Squareness
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
- Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Valve Spring Strength
Valve Spring Strength
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1621
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the
specified valve spring length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1622
Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Valve Springs
Valve Springs
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1623
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters
and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original
positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. Remove the spark plugs.
5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring,
valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall
into the cylinder.
Connect the compressed air supply to the No. 1 cylinder.
6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring.
- Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet,
using some grease and a small screwdriver.
- Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
Installation
1. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring.
- Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
- Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some grease and a small screwdriver.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1624
2. Disconnect the compressed air supply.
3. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders.
4. Install the spark plugs.
5. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them.
6. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Camshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter
Valve Stem Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1629
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection
Valve Inspection
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring.
2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores.
3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking.
4. The valve margin for wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1630
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem To Valve Guide Clearance
Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the Engine System Level for the specification.
NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve
guide clearance.
1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base.
Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve
guide.
2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture
and zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the
Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and note
the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
- NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter > Page 1637
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1640
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation
Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Accessory Drive
Belt Tensioner
NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit.
Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given
accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks, or
some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for
correct tension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind.
1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under
Accessory Drive See: Description and Operation in
the Description and Operation.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out
the following tests:
- Move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed
position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the
tensioner spring.
- Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
- Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new
tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically.
4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical > Page 1646
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows:
1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory
drive tensioner should move (respond) when the
A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive
belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt
rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If
excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View >
Page 1649
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt
from the tensioner pulley.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit.
Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Mount: > 09-22-19 >
Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Engine Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Mount: > 09-22-19 >
Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 1658
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Mount: >
09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On
Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Mount: >
09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 1664
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Mount: Procedures
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate system and procedure for special instructions on loosening and
tightening mount fasteners.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. NOTICE: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may
occur.
Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the
same distance.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1667
Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement
Engine Mount
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the engine coolant degas bottle.
3. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Install the Engine Support Bar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1668
5. Remove the engine mount bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
6. Use the Engine Support Bar to raise the engine 25 mm (0.98 in).
7. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine mount bracket.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the A/C tube bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
9. Rotate the A/C tube brackets off of the studs.
- Reposition the A/C tubes to access the engine mount bolt.
10. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1673
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal and Installation
All idler pulleys
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the
accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley.
Smooth idler pulley
4. Loosen the bolt and remove the smooth accessory drive belt idler pulley.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Grooved idler pulley
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the grooved accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ...........................................................................................................
..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1678
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1682
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1683
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 5.0 qts. (4.73 L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1688
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name US
.......................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Canada
...................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
Ford Part Number US ..........................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ X0-5W20-QSP Canada ..............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... CX0-5W20-LSP12
Ford Specifications
.......................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Tools and Equipment
Oil Cooler: Tools and Equipment
1/2" Oil Cooler Line Rem.
AST tool# 8023
Used to disconnect 1/2" transmission oil cooler lines.
- Used for R and R of Transmission Oil Cooler Lines
- Orange-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- Quick line removal
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set
- Fits 2009 Escape with 6F Trans
- Fits Ford Edge
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Tools and Equipment > Page 1692
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Element
Oil Filter Element
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Loosen the oil filter drain plug.
3. Using a cup-style oil filter wrench, loosen the oil filter cover one turn.
4. Remove the oil filter drain plug and drain the engine oil from the oil filter and adapter.
- Remove and discard the oil filter drain plug O-ring seal.
5. Remove the oil filter cover and oil filter element.
- Discard the oil filter element.
- Remove and discard the oil filter cover O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Wipe clean the oil filter cover and mounting surface on the oil filter adapter.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the oil filter cover O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install a new oil filter cover O-ring seal.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the oil filter cover. Overtightening the oil filter cover may damage
the cover or O-ring seal and result in a
oil leak.
Install a new oil filter element and the oil filter cover.
- Using a cup-style oil wrench, tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the oil filter drain plug O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install a new oil filter drain plug O-ring seal.
5. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the oil filter drain plug. Overtightening the oil filter drain plug may
damage the drain plug, O-ring seal or
cover and result in a oil leak.
Install the oil filter drain plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1697
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid.
2. Remove the plug and the VCT system oil filter from the intake camshaft thrust cap.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1698
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil
Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1699
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1700
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1701
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure
(EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1702
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Element > Page 1703
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter
Oil Filter Adapter
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer (not shown), 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. If equipped, remove the oil filter element. For additional information, refer to Oil Filter Element
See: Oil Filter/Service and Repair/Oil Filter
Element.
5. If equipped, remove the spin-on oil filter.
- To install, lubricate the spin-on oil filter gasket with clean engine oil and tighten the oil filter
three-fourths turn after the oil filter gasket makes contact with the oil filter adapter.
6. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Remove the 4 bolts and the oil filter adapter.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1708
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1709
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1710
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1711
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil
Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1712
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter > Page 1713
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Install the remaining oil pan bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to.................................................
.................................................................................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1719
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1720
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1721
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1722
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1723
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1724
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the engine oil, then install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
3. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and
Repair.
4. Remove the 4 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts.
5. Remove the 13 bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces
of sealant.
Clean and inspect all mating surfaces.
2. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan.
3. Position the oil pan and install the 2 rear oil pan bolts finger-tight.
4. Using a suitable straightedge, align the front surface of the oil pan flush with the front surface of
the engine block.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1725
5. Install the remaining oil pan bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. Install the 4 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See: Timing
Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair
.
8. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1729
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1732
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1733
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1734
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1735
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine
Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1736
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1737
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1742
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1743
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1744
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded
View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1745
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1746
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1747
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Oil Pan.
3. NOTE: Discard the gasket and clean and inspect the gasket mating surfaces.
Remove the 2 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ...........................................................................................................
..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1752
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold
Install the intake manifold gasket, intake manifold and 7 bolts. Tighten to...........................................
.........................................................................................................................................................18
Nm (159 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Intake Manifold > Page 1757
Intake Manifold: Specifications Throttle Body
To install, tighten to..............................................................................................................................
.........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1758
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold (View 1 of 2)
Intake Manifold (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1759
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the fuel pressure.
3. NOTICE: Before removing the high voltage cables, the vehicle electrical system must be
completely shut down for at least 5 minutes to
allow for the high voltage capacitors to discharge.
Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
4. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud.
5. Remove the fuel rail.
6. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
7. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner.
8. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
9. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the EVAP tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling and the brake
booster vacuum tube from the intake manifold.
12. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector and detach the 2 pin-type retainers.
13. Detach the 2 wiring retainers from the intake manifold near the throttle body mounting area.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1760
14. Detach the transaxle shift cable routing retainer from the intake manifold.
15. NOTE: The cylinder head side of the intake manifold is showing the location of the 7 bolts.
Remove the 7 bolts and position the intake manifold aside to access the PCV hose connector.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
16. Squeeze the 2 PCV hose connector tabs and disconnect the PCV hose from the intake
manifold.
17. Remove the intake manifold and gaskets.
18. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically
including valve or piston damage, check the
intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Inspect and install new intake manifold gaskets if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flywheel See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flywheel.
3. Drain the engine oil.
- Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: If the oil pan is not removed, damage to the rear oil seal retainer joint can occur.
Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan.
5. Remove the 6 bolts and the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate.
Installation
1. Using the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer, position the crankshaft rear oil seal with
retainer plate onto the crankshaft.
2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate and bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1766
3. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool and metal surface
cleaner to remove traces of sealant.
Clean and inspect all the oil pan and cylinder block mating surfaces.
4. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying the
silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan.
5. Install the oil pan. Install the 2 oil pan bolts finger-tight.
6. Install the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Install the remaining oil pan bolts and tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm
(18 lb-ft).
8. Install the flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flywheel See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flywheel.
9. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1767
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear
Oil Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1768
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools or severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
2. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove the through bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front oil seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1773
2. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Lower End Components - Exploded View and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block
Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1774
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Exploded View - Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft
Front Oil Seal
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Front Seal > Page 1775
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1780
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Seals
Valve Seals
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1781
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters
and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original
positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. Remove the spark plugs.
5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring,
valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall
into the cylinder.
Connect the compressed air supply to the No. 1 cylinder.
6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring.
- Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet,
using some grease and a small screwdriver.
- Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
7. Using the Slide Hammer and the Valve Stem Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the valve
seal.
Installation
1. Install the valve stem seal installation sleeve.
2. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1782
3. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring.
- Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
- Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some grease and a small screwdriver.
4. Disconnect the compressed air supply.
5. Install the spark plugs.
6. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders.
7. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them.
8. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Camshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1787
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1790
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1791
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1792
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1793
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine
Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1794
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 1795
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolts.......................................................................................................................
...........................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams
Timing Chain: Diagrams
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to the
engine. Turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation only.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Remove the engine plug bolt.
NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past
TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft
must remain at the TDC position until the timing drive components and crankshaft pulley are
installed.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
NOTICE: Install the camshafts with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the Camshaft
Alignment Plate can be installed without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1
cylinder are in the same position as noted in the disassembly procedure. Rotating the camshafts
when the timing chain is removed, or installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position, can
cause severe damage to the valves and pistons.
NOTE: Install a new crankshaft sprocket diamond washer on both sides of the crankshaft sprocket.
Install the crankshaft sprocket, new crankshaft sprocket diamond washers, oil pump chain and oil
pump sprocket. - The crankshaft sprocket flange must be facing away from the engine block.
Install the oil pump chain, sprocket and bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1803
NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Install the timing chain.
NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage.
Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts.
NOTE: Do not install the crankshaft pulley bolt at this time.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing.
Position the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft with the hole in the pulley at the 6 o'clock
position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1804
NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the 6 mm bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Install a standard 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front
cover.
NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during installation of
the pulley bolt or damage to the engine can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in
place with the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and the bolt should be installed using hand tools
only.
NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Install a new crankshaft pulley bolt. Using the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool to hold the
crankshaft pulley in place, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1805
NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise one and three-fourth turns.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Using the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley. - If it is not possible to
install the bolt, the engine valve timing must be corrected.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate to check the position of the camshafts. - If it is not possible to
install the Camshaft Alignment Plate, the engine valve timing must be corrected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1806
Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Install the engine plug bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Install the timing chain tensioner and the bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston.
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1810
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
Timing Drive Components
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools or severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
3. Compress the timing chain tensioner in the following sequence.
1. Using a small pick, release and hold the ratchet mechanism.
2. While holding the ratchet mechanism in the released position, compress the tensioner by
pushing the timing chain arm toward the tensioner.
3. Insert a paper clip into the hole to retain the tensioner.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and timing chain tensioner.
5. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm.
6. Remove the timing chain.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1811
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the timing chain guide.
8. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust
camshaft sprocket.
9. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the camshaft
phaser and sprocket.
Installation
1. Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
2. Install the timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1812
3. Install the timing chain.
4. Install the timing chain tensioner arm.
NOTE: If the timing chain tensioner plunger and ratchet assembly are not pinned in the
compressed position, follow the next 4 steps.
5. NOTICE: Do not compress the ratchet assembly. This will damage the ratchet assembly.
Using the edge of a vise, compress the timing chain tensioner plunger.
6. Using a small pick, push back and hold the ratchet mechanism.
7. While holding the ratchet mechanism, push the ratchet arm back into the tensioner housing.
8. Install a paper clip into the hole in the tensioner housing to hold the ratchet assembly and the
plunger in during installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1813
9. Install the timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
10. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts.
- Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
11. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following
specifications: Tighten the 8-mm bolts to.............................................................................................
................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Tighten the 13-mm bolts to.......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1817
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1818
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt and tensioner.
3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information refer to Crankshaft Pulley See:
Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
4. Remove the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine
Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
5. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front seal.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
7. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 bolts and the CKP sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1819
9. Remove the bolts and the engine front cover.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive disks or other abrasive
means to clean sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the mounting surfaces of the engine and the front cover.
2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of
applying the silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the cylinder head and oil pan joint
areas. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the front cover.
3. Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following
specifications:
- Tighten the 8-mm bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Tighten the 13-mm bolts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1820
4. NOTE: Remove the through bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front seal.
5. Install the coolant pump pulley and the 3 bolts.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. Install the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine
Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
7. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Crankshaft Pulley.
8. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a standard 6 mm (0.23 in) x 18 mm (0.7 in) bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it
into the front cover.
9. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
10. Using the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner, adjust the CKP sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1821
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
11. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
12. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
13. Install the accessory drive belt and tensioner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1826
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The intake phase shifting (IPS) VCT system enables rotation of the intake camshaft relative to the
crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions.
The VCT system has several operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and
default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module
(PCM) determines the phase angle based on a constant angle, limited by engine oil temperature
and engine RPM. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on
engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced
engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved
torque.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), cylinder head temperature
(CHT), CMP, accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor (via requested torque), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating
conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the
camshaft position based on engine oil temperature and engine speed inputs. During cold start
emissions reduction mode, the camshaft position is determined via engine speed and estimates of
engine coolant temperature and catalyst temperature (estimated from other sensors already used
such as IAT/CHT/MAF/CKP). During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and accelerator pedal position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating oil temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met.
3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning.
4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the
flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Filter: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid.
2. Remove the plug and the VCT system oil filter from the intake camshaft thrust cap.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1837
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1838
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 1072 RPM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1846
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1855
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.08-1.18 mm (0.042-0.046 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1860
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1861
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1862
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1863
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1866
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1870
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Crank the engine as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1871
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake:.............................................................................................
.........................................................................................................0.25 mm (0.0095 in). exhaust:.....
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: intake:........................................................
.............................................................................................................................0.22-0.28 mm
(0.008-0.011 in). exhaust:.....................................................................................................................
..............................................................0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1875
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
Select the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets
See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Install the new O-ring, coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to.........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................10 Nm (89
lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 1879
Water Pump: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) Pump
The motor electronics cooling system is required to maintain an acceptable temperature for the
transaxle and the DC/DC converter. The system temperature is monitored by the motor electronics
coolant temperature (MECT) sensor, which is an input to the PCM. The PCM commands the
MECS pump using the MECS pump relay. The MECS pump is commanded on whenever the
traction battery contactors are closed. The coolant in the system flows in a loop from the MECS
pump, to the transaxle, then into the MECS radiator bottom hose port, out of the top hose port of
the MECS radiator, into the DC/DC converter, and back into the MECS pump. The cooling system
has a degassing system that is connected in parallel between the MECS radiator and the MECS
pump. The degassing system bleeds air/gases into the degas reservoir.
Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) Pump
Motor Electronics Coolant Flow
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 1880
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
3. Remove the accessory drive belt.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing
and tightening the fasteners, or damage to
the coolant pump may occur.
Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Motor > Page 1886
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heater Pump Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heater Pump Motor > Page 1889
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1890
Auxiliary Water Pump: Description and Operation
Heater Pump
The heater pump is required to maintain engine coolant flow to the heater core for passenger
compartment heating when the engine is not running. The PCM commands the heater pump on by
energizing the heater pump control relay (HPCR).
The pump is commanded on when the following conditions are met:
- The key is in the ON/START position.
- The engine coolant temperature is above a minimum threshold 0°C (32°F) nominal.
- The inferred ambient temperature is below a calibrated value 32°C (90°F) nominal.
- The engine speed is below a calibrated threshold (nominal 4,000 RPM) including engine OFF.
- The climate control mode switch is in any position other than OFF.
The pump is off when the climate control mode switch is set to OFF.
Heater Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1891
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the engine coolant.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1892
- Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the intake manifold.
4. Disconnect and remove the coolant bypass tube.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine coolant .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 7.4 qts (7.0L)
Motor/Electronics (M/E) Coolant ..........................................................................................................
......................................................... 3.7 qts. (3.5 L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1900
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with Bettering agent (yellow-colored)
Ford Part Number ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................
.................................................... WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew
the coolant pressure relief cap when the
engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and
hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: The degas bottle has 2 separate reservoirs. The front (larger) reservoir is part of the engine
cooling system. The rear (smaller) reservoir is part of the Motor Electronics Cooling System
(MECS).
Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half-turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the engine coolant return hose and the motor electronics coolant
return hose.
3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle.
4. Disconnect the MECS coolant vent hose.
5. Disconnect the 2 engine coolant vent hoses.
6. Detach the pin-type retainer from the degas bottle.
7. Remove the degas bottle bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) and the bolt to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the engine coolant and MECS coolant return hoses.
- Remove the degas bottle.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 1904
10. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and
Repair and Motor Electronics Cooling System
(MECS) Draining and Filling in Transmission Cooler, A/T for the recommended coolant mixtures
and fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 1910
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1913
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1921
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1922
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1923
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1924
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1933
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1934
Remove the 2 bolts, the nut and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the center support lower bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Remove the bolt and the center support.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 bolts and position the auxiliary coolant pump aside.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors.
11. Remove the 6 cooling fan bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. NOTE: Remove the LH cooling fan first and slide the RH cooling fan to the left side to remove.
Remove the LH and the RH cooling fans.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1939
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1940
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1951
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1952
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1953
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 1960
Remove the 2 bolts, the nut and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the center support lower bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Remove the bolt and the center support.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 bolts and position the auxiliary coolant pump aside.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors.
11. Remove the 6 cooling fan bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. NOTE: Remove the LH cooling fan first and slide the RH cooling fan to the left side to remove.
Remove the LH and the RH cooling fans.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1965
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1966
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1967
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 1968
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Heater Core And
Evaporator Core Housing.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Drain the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS).
4. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud See: Radiator Cooling
Fan/Radiator Cooling Fan Motor/Service and Repair.
5. Disconnect the upper hose from the MECS radiator.
6. Remove the 2 MECS radiator-to-engine radiator bolts and position the MECS radiator aside.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position the A/C condenser aside.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 1975
9. Disconnect the degas bottle return hose from the radiator.
10. Disconnect the engine coolant vent hose from the radiator.
11. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator.
12. Remove the radiator.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
14. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
15. Fill and bleed the MECS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay > Page 1981
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1987
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1993
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1994
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1995
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Engine Cooling
Component Tests
Thermostat
A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried
out:
- Pinpoint Test A, B or C
- Thermostat Visual Inspection
Thermostat Visual Inspection
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including:
- Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve)
- Foreign material lodged in the main valve
- Bent or broken frame or flange
- Bent or broken spring
- Bent or broken valve or valve stem
- Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir
- Any other damage or distortion
3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using
hot water or other heat sources. This method is
not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat.
If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install
a new thermostat.
4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to
the Symptom Chart for further instructions. See:
Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The thermostat and thermostat housing are serviced as an assembly.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner.
4. NOTE: The view of the thermostat housing bolts is obstructed by A/C and engine components.
However, the bolts can be removed using 1/4-in
drive hand tools.
Remove the 3 bolts and reposition the thermostat housing to gain access to the hose clamps.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2005
5. Disconnect the heater hose at the thermostat housing.
6. Disconnect the lower radiator hose at the thermostat housing.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Install the new O-ring, coolant pump and the 3 bolts. Tighten to.........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................10 Nm (89
lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2009
Water Pump: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) Pump
The motor electronics cooling system is required to maintain an acceptable temperature for the
transaxle and the DC/DC converter. The system temperature is monitored by the motor electronics
coolant temperature (MECT) sensor, which is an input to the PCM. The PCM commands the
MECS pump using the MECS pump relay. The MECS pump is commanded on whenever the
traction battery contactors are closed. The coolant in the system flows in a loop from the MECS
pump, to the transaxle, then into the MECS radiator bottom hose port, out of the top hose port of
the MECS radiator, into the DC/DC converter, and back into the MECS pump. The cooling system
has a degassing system that is connected in parallel between the MECS radiator and the MECS
pump. The degassing system bleeds air/gases into the degas reservoir.
Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) Pump
Motor Electronics Coolant Flow
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2010
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the accessory drive belt.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing
and tightening the fasteners, or damage to
the coolant pump may occur.
Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2021
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic Converter
Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page
2027
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Exhaust Manifold: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2036
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Exhaust Manifold: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2042
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2043
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Install 7 new exhaust manifold studs in the cylinder head. Tighten to..................................................
..................................................................................................................................................17 Nm
(150 lb-in).
Position the catalytic converter and tighten the 7 new nuts in the sequence shown in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to...............................................................................................................................
..........................................................48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to..........................................
...............................................................................................................................................48 Nm
(35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2044
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the
gasket sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an
exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm
(0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On(R) GA438A or equivalent. For example, if
the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
from end to end.
Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for
warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Downpipe
Exhaust Downpipe - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, Position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe.
3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 2 exhaust downpipe-to-exhaust manifold nuts and the exhaust downpipe.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gaskets and nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2049
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2050
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2051
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2052
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2053
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Intermediate Pipe
Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.5L
2. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts.
2.5L Hybrid
3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts.
All vehicles
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate pipe flange
studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from
side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts
and remove the intermediate pipe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw
Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate flange, make sure to
line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl
grooves in the exhaust intermediate flange.
If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to
push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2054
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe gasket by hand.
5. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts and
alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3
stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2.5L Hybrid
6. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2.5L
7. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2063
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2069
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View
Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2074
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2075
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2076
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2077
Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler
Muffler
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a one piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a
2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
The muffler and catalytic converter are serviced together. For additional information, refer to
Catalytic Converter - Underbody See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Underbody.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator spring nuts.
3. NOTICE: Remove the resonator-to-muffler gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the
gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under
the gasket or damage to the flange may occur.
Detach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers and remove the resonator.
- Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Inspect the resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push
the 8-mm stud(s) out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 8-mm
stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 2081
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket.
5. Install the resonator and attach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers.
6. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page
2091
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2097
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery, Hybrid Drive > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High-Voltage Traction Battery
Battery, Hybrid Drive: Service and Repair High-Voltage Traction Battery
High-Voltage Traction Battery
Removal and Installation
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery, Hybrid Drive > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High-Voltage Traction Battery > Page 2104
NOTE: A replacement High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) may have a low state of charge that is
insufficient to start the vehicle. If this occurs, follow the instructions for the jump start procedure in
the Owner's Literature.
1. Depower the HVTB. For additional information, refer to High-Voltage Traction Battery Systems
Depowering See: Service and
Repair/High-Voltage Traction Battery Systems Depowering.
2. Remove the rear cargo area carpet insert.
3. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the HVTB first or an airflow loss to the HVTB may
occur.
Remove the 5 A/C return duct assembly screws. To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
4. Remove the A/C return duct assembly.
5. NOTE: Due to clearance issues, the 40-pin connector must be disconnected last during the
removal process and connected first during the
installation process.
Loosen the bolt and disconnect the 40-pin low voltage connector.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
6. From the right rear door opening, fold the right rear seat cushion forward and remove the 2
high-voltage cables shield nuts (access the shield nuts
through the slotted opening in the carpet). To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Fold the right rear seat backrest down and remove the high-voltage cables shield bolt, then
remove the scrivet.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the high-voltage cables shield.
9. Press the locking tab down and rotate the locking lever upward until the aligning dowels are
disengaged from the locking lever to remove the
high-voltage cables electrical connector.
10. NOTE: The attaching bolts have a conductive coating on them and are serrated under the head
flange. These features ground the HVTB to the
vehicle, which is required for electro-magnetic compatibility. If a bolt(s) is lost or damaged, a new
bolt(s) must be installed with the identical type of bolt.
Remove the 9 HVTB bolts. NOTE: Hand-start all of the bolts before tightening them to specification.
To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
11. NOTE: Make certain to reinstall this plug during the HVTB installation procedure to avoid NVH
issues.
Remove the cap plug to expose the center (rear) lifting attachment point.
12. Attach 3 M10 x 1.5 x 35 eyebolts to the 3 HVTB lift points. Install nuts onto the eye bolts to gain
the proper eyebolt height. Obtain the eyebolts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery, Hybrid Drive > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High-Voltage Traction Battery > Page 2105
locally.
13. NOTICE: Use chain lengths as specified. Changing the chain length may result in damage to
the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB)
or HVTB lifting points.
Attach the lengths of chain to the eyebolts and the lifting device.
14. NOTICE: Make certain the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) does not mar or damage the
interior panels during removal. There is
only 6 mm (0.23 in) clearance on each side.
With an assistant, lift the HVTB off the 2 alignment dowels using a floor crane.
15. NOTE: Do not strike the headliner with the HVTB (or floor crane) during removal.
Cover the battery mounting brackets with protective padding and remove the HVTB from the
vehicle.
16. Inspect the HVTB tray drain grommet located in the floor pan underneath the HVTB. Replace if
necessary.
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery, Hybrid Drive > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High-Voltage Traction Battery > Page 2106
Battery, Hybrid Drive: Service and Repair High Voltage Traction Battery - 12 Volt Battery
12 Volt Battery
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid and produce explosive gases. Work in a well-ventilated
area. Do not allow the battery to come in contact with flames, sparks or burning substances. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with
water for a minimum of 15 minutes, then get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always lift a plastic-cased battery with a battery carrier or with hands on opposite
corners. Excessive pressure on the battery end walls may cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
3. Remove the battery wedge clamp and bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the battery.
5. Remove the 4 bolts and the battery tray.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan, Hybrid Drive >
Battery Cooling Fan Module, Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan, Hybrid Drive >
Battery Cooling Fan Module, Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > Page 2111
Battery Cooling Fan Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan, Hybrid Drive >
Battery Cooling Fan Module, Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > Page 2112
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Bus / Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hybrid Battery Bus / Cable: Service and Repair
High-Voltage Cables
Removal and Installation
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Bus / Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2116
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Depower the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). For additional information, refer to
High-Voltage Traction Battery Systems Depowering
See: Service and Repair/High-Voltage Traction Battery Systems Depowering.
2. From the right rear door opening, fold the right rear seat cushion forward and remove the 2
high-voltage cables shield nuts (access the shield nuts
through the slotted opening in the carpet). To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Fold the right rear seat backrest down and remove the high-voltage cables shield bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the high-voltage cables shield plastic rivet/screw.
5. Remove the high-voltage cables shield.
6. Press the locking tab down and rotate the locking lever upward until the aligning dowels are
disengaged from the locking lever to remove the
high-voltage cables electrical connector.
7. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
8. Remove the high-voltage cables floorpan grommet.
9. Remove the 2 bolts and the park brake cable bracket.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
10. Remove the 4 bolts and the exhaust heat shield.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Remove the bolt and position the engine ground strap aside.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
12. Remove the 5 high-voltage cables conduit nuts (right side inner frame rail and floorpan).
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Lower the vehicle.
14. Remove the 2 high-voltage cables bracket nuts (bulkhead). (Access the nuts through the
engine compartment.)
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
15. Remove the nut and the eCVT shift cable.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
16. Remove the high-voltage cables to the eCVT bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
17. Rotate the locking lever rearward until the alignment dowels are disengaged from the locking
lever and remove the high-voltage cables connection
to the eCVT.
18. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Hybrid Battery Service Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Battery System, Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2120
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter, Hybrid Drive >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter
Voltage Converter: Service and Repair Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter
Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter
Removal and Installation
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Depower the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). For additional information, refer to Hybrid
Drive Systems.
2. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
3. Remove the degas bottle.
4. Disconnect the 2 female pin-type retainers from the DC/DC converter bracket.
5. NOTE: Press the locking clip to release the connector.
Disconnect the DC/DC converter high voltage connector.
6. Clamp the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) hoses to prevent coolant from leaking
from the hoses during the repair.
7. Loosen the hose clamps and remove the MECS hoses from the DC/DC converter.
8. WARNING: Always tighten the DC/DC converter low-voltage battery cable fasteners to
specification. Loose connections may result in
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter, Hybrid Drive >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter > Page 2126
electrical arcing, which increases both the risk of fires and serious personal injury.
Remove the 2 DC/DC converter low voltage battery cable nuts and remove the low voltage battery
cables. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the DC/DC converter low voltage electrical connector.
10. Remove the 3 DC/DC converter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
11. Remove the DC/DC converter assembly.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter, Hybrid Drive >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter > Page 2127
Voltage Converter: Service and Repair Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter Wiring
Harness
Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter Wiring Harness
Removal and Installation
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Depower the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). For additional information, refer to Hybrid
Drive Systems.
2. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter, Hybrid Drive >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter > Page 2128
3. Remove the engine cover.
4. Disconnect the DC/DC converter harness connector from the Electronically Controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT).
5. Remove the degas bottle.
6. Disconnect the plastic loop.
7. Disconnect the 2 pin-type retainers.
8. Disconnect the 2 female pin-type retainers.
9. NOTE: Press the locking clip to release the connector.
Disconnect the DC/DC converter high voltage electrical connector.
10. Remove the DC/DC converter wiring harness.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module
Voltage Converter Module: Locations DC/AC Inverter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module
Voltage Converter Module: Diagrams DC/AC Inverter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2137
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2138
Voltage Converter Module: Diagrams DC/DC Converter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2141
Voltage Converter Module: Description and Operation
DC/DC Enable (DCE)
The DCE is an output from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. The PCM enables the DC/DC
converter after the PCM receives a contactors closed message and no error messages. The DCE
circuit is high (the low side driver is off) when the DC/DC is commanded on. When the DCE low
side driver is activated, the DC/DC converter is commanded off. For additional information on DCE,
refer to the DC/DC converter description in Hybrid Electric Control Hardware See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Hybrid Electric Control
Hardware.
DC/DC Fault
The DC/DC fault (DCF) signal is an input to the PCM from the DC/DC converter. This signal is low
under normal conditions and switches high when a concern exists within the DC/DC converter
cooling system, the high voltage power supply to the DC/DC converter, or the low voltage output
system. The PCM disables or limits the operation of the DC/DC converter by the DC/DC enable
circuit (DCE), when a DCF concern is indicated. For additional information on DCF, refer to the
DC/DC converter description in Hybrid Electric Control Hardware See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Hybrid Electric Control
Hardware.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Power Control System, Hybrid Drive > Voltage Inverter, Hybrid Drive >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Voltage Inverter: Description and Operation
Generator Shut Down (GSDN)
The PCM keeps the generator motor inverter enabled by continuously toggling the generator motor
shut down (GMSDN) output. Typical output frequency varies between 49 and 75 Hz at 50% duty
cycle. The PCM also broadcasts a redundant not shutdown message to the TCM over the
communication link. When a concern condition is detected, the PCM stops generating this
frequency signal and broadcasts a shutdown message to the TCM over the communication link.
The TCM then disables the generator motor inverter and sets an appropriate DTC. In the event of
GMSDN circuit failure, the PCM still broadcasts a not shutdown message but the hard wire signal
frequency is out of expected range. If the circuit becomes open, the vehicle shutdowns and the
TCM sets the appropriate DTC.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > Page 2149
Battery Cooling Fan Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Battery Cooling Fan Module,
Hybrid Drive > Component Information > Locations > Page 2150
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module
Voltage Converter Module: Locations DC/AC Inverter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2155
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Locations > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2156
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module
Voltage Converter Module: Diagrams DC/AC Inverter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2159
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2160
Voltage Converter Module: Diagrams DC/DC Converter Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2161
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > DC/AC Inverter Module > Page 2162
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Relays and Modules - Hybrid Drive > Voltage Converter Module, Hybrid
Drive > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2163
Voltage Converter Module: Description and Operation
DC/DC Enable (DCE)
The DCE is an output from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. The PCM enables the DC/DC
converter after the PCM receives a contactors closed message and no error messages. The DCE
circuit is high (the low side driver is off) when the DC/DC is commanded on. When the DCE low
side driver is activated, the DC/DC converter is commanded off. For additional information on DCE,
refer to the DC/DC converter description in Hybrid Electric Control Hardware See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Hybrid Electric Control
Hardware.
DC/DC Fault
The DC/DC fault (DCF) signal is an input to the PCM from the DC/DC converter. This signal is low
under normal conditions and switches high when a concern exists within the DC/DC converter
cooling system, the high voltage power supply to the DC/DC converter, or the low voltage output
system. The PCM disables or limits the operation of the DC/DC converter by the DC/DC enable
circuit (DCE), when a DCF concern is indicated. For additional information on DCF, refer to the
DC/DC converter description in Hybrid Electric Control Hardware See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Hybrid Electric Control
Hardware.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Hybrid Battery Service Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Battery Service Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2168
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Hybrid Drive Systems > Sensors and Switches - Hybrid Drive > Hybrid Drive Coolant
Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hybrid Drive Coolant Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
The MECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. A
thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage
divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The MECT provides motor electronics cooling
system temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses this information for determining when
to activate the cooling system fans and indicate over-temperature.
Typical Thread Type Sensor
Motor Electronics Coolant Temperature (MECT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an
accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires two
wires).
- An internal spring is used to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is
typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See:
Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize the fuel control while delivering the
requested torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2178
ECT System Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
a Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register
a concern.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions for
additional DTC information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2179
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
a Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2188
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 2193
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2199
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 2204
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2205
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2206
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2207
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2208
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2209
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2210
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2211
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2212
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2213
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2214
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the
VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing
PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to carry out this procedure correctly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio
out of Acceptable Range. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of
functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel
octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, and the presence of speed control. Only
items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan
tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Reprogramming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and
the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it is replaced.
Manual data entry must be carried out if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out
the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make certain
that all parameters are included. Failure to correctly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) or axle ratio, may result in codes
P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As Built data center for the information
needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM
cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact the
National Hotline or Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As Built data. Non-Ford
technicians, use the Motorcraft website at Motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft homepage, use the
search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
PCM Reprogramming
Note: After the PCM is successfully reprogrammed, clear any TCM DTCs that may have been
stored during reprogramming.
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2217
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal. Install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2225
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Fuel Pump (FP) control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2234
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2235
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers
and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2239
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2240
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2241
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2245
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2246
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2247
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2251
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2252
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2253
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2254
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2255
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2259
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2260
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Computers and
Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2261
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2266
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2267
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2268
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2269
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2270
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2271
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2275
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2279
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2280
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is integrated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. It is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying
resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to
the PCM corresponding to temperature.
A thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
the total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, and ignition timing.
Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2284
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2285
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2286
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2290
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2291
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to
the absolute pressure in the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor is part of the EGR system. The PCM uses information from the MAP, TP, MAF,
CHT and CKP sensors to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2292
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
3. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
4. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2301
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2307
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2310
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #12 > Page 2313
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2314
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2317
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2318
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2326
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2327
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers
and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2331
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2332
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2333
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2341
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs,
the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which
opens the electrical contacts of the switch. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the
location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2342
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2350
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2351
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2352
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2356
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2357
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2358
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2359
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2360
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2368
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2369
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2370
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2375
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2376
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 1072 RPM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2384
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2393
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.08-1.18 mm (0.042-0.046 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2398
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2399
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2400
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2401
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2404
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2408
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Crank the engine as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2409
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake:.............................................................................................
.........................................................................................................0.25 mm (0.0095 in). exhaust:.....
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: intake:........................................................
.............................................................................................................................0.22-0.28 mm
(0.008-0.011 in). exhaust:.....................................................................................................................
..............................................................0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2413
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
Select the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2418
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2419
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2423
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2424
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2425
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2429
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2430
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is integrated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. It is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying
resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to
the PCM corresponding to temperature.
A thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
the total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, and ignition timing.
Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2434
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2435
Brake Signal: Description and Operation
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is a normally open switch that, when closed, sends a signal to the PCM when the
brake pedal is applied. The PCM strategy uses this signal input to aid the PCM in determining the
correct function and operation of the vehicle speed control, the electronic throttle control (ETC),
and the transaxle and regenerative braking systems. The BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and
supplies positive battery voltage (+12 volts) when the brake pedal is applied. When the brake pedal
is released, the BPP switch opens and no battery voltage input is sent to the PCM.The PID name
for this switch is BOO1
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)
The BPS used for vehicle speed control deactivation is a normally closed switch, which supplies
positive battery voltage (+12 volts) to the PCM when the brake pedal is released. When the brake
pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the BPS circuit to
the PCM.
The normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, is used by the PCM strategy
for a brake pedal rationality test. The PCM strategy looks for each switch to change states when
the brake pedal is applied and released. If a failure occurs in one or both of the brake pedal inputs
a diagnostic trouble code is set and the PCM misfire on board diagnostic (OBD) monitor is
disabled.The PID name for this switch is BOO2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2439
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2440
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2441
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2445
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2446
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2447
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2448
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2449
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2453
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2457
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2458
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Motor
The TAC motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires two wires). The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing. An internal spring is used to return the throttle plate to a default
position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard
stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow
required at idle. For additional information, REFER to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an
accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires two
wires).
- An internal spring is used to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is
typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See:
Description and Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize the fuel control while delivering the
requested torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2462
ECT System Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
a Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register
a concern.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Testing
and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2463
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble
Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
a Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10
> Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10
> Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2472
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 >
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 >
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 2477
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3
> Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3
> Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2483
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3
> Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3
> Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 2488
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2489
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2490
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2491
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2492
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2493
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2494
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2495
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2496
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2497
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2498
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the
VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing
PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to carry out this procedure correctly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio
out of Acceptable Range. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of
functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel
octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, and the presence of speed control. Only
items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan
tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Reprogramming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and
the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it is replaced.
Manual data entry must be carried out if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out
the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make certain
that all parameters are included. Failure to correctly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) or axle ratio, may result in codes
P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As Built data center for the information
needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM
cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact the
National Hotline or Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As Built data. Non-Ford
technicians, use the Motorcraft website at Motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft homepage, use the
search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
PCM Reprogramming
Note: After the PCM is successfully reprogrammed, clear any TCM DTCs that may have been
stored during reprogramming.
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2501
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal. Install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2505
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2506
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and
Operation/Powertrain Control Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2507
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2512
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2513
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2514
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2515
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2516
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2517
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2521
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2526
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2527
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2528
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2529
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2530
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2531
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2532
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2533
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2534
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2535
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2536
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2537
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2538
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2539
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2540
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2541
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2542
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2543
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2544
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2545
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2546
14-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2547
14-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2548
Information Bus: Description and Operation
Communications Network - Hybrid
Vehicle communication utilizes both ISO 9141 and Controller Area Network (CAN)
communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows many modules to
communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking is a method for
transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring
resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial
data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information
is sent to the individual control modules that control each function.
The vehicle has 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
- Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
- High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
All 3 networks are connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing
of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module
on the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between
the steering column and the Audio Control Module (ACM).
Network Topology
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2549
ISO 9141 Network Operation
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only.
The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module:
- Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Operation
The MS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair
cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network
allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules:
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- HVAC module
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Operation
The HS-CAN communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted
pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this
network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules:
- 4X4 control module
- ABS module
- APIM (if equipped)
- Battery Control Module (BCM)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2550
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Network Termination
The CAN uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network
termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors.
Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are
broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the
termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and
negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network,
and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or
total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by:
- Stabilizing bus voltage
- Eliminating electrical interference
Gateway Module
The Instrument Cluster (IC) is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice
versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The IC is the
only module on this vehicle that has this ability.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Communications Network
Principles Of Operation
Communications Network
Principles of Operation
Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and
Controller Area Network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only, and
CAN is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
The vehicle is equipped with 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
- Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
- High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
ISO 9141 Communications Network
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network. The ISO communications network
does not permit intermodule communication and is only used for the Parking Aid Module (PAM).
When the scan tool communicates with the parking aid module, the scan tool must request all
information, the module cannot initiate communications.
The ISO network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 10 Kbps for bus messages and is
designed for scan tool to module diagnostic use only.
The following fault chart describes the specific ISO 9141 network failures and their resulting
symptom:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2553
ISO 9141 Network Communication Fault Chart
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
The MS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+)
and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested
network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN is used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the
Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM), HVAC module,
the Audio Control Module (ACM), the APIM, the Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
module and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) communications, and is designed for general
information transfer. The MS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will
operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The MS-CAN bus may remain
operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is
designed for general information transfer. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded
level when certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific MS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom:
MS-CAN Communication Fault Chart
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+)
and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested
network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network
used for the Instrument Cluster (IC), the PCM, the ABS module, the APIM, the Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), the Battery Control
Module (BCM), the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the Power Steering Control Module
(PSCM) and the 4X4 control module communications, and designed for real time information
transfer and control. The HS-CAN will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will
operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The HS-CAN bus may remain
operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The HS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for real time
information transfer and control. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when
certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific HS-CAN failures and their resulting symptom:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2554
HS-CAN Communication Fault Chart
The following chart describes the specific CAN messages broadcast by each module, and the
module(s) that receive the message:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2555
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2556
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2557
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2558
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2559
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2560
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2561
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2562
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2563
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2564
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 6)
Inspection And Verification
Communications Network
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
- If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2565
Visual Inspection Chart
3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Go To Pinpoint Test V, to diagnose No Power To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint
Test V: No Power To The Scan Tool
4. Establish a scan tool session.
- NOTE: The scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM, after establishing
communication with the PCM, the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other
modules on the vehicle.
If an IDS session cannot be established wit the vehicle, (IDS may state "No communication can be
established with the PCM"): Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts whether or not to retry communication.
- Enter either a PCM part number, tear tag or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a
session.
5. Carry out the network test.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step
6.
- If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to diagnose the failed communication network.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
- If a module fails to communication during the network test, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
6. Retrieve and review the DTCs.
- If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC
diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all
other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2566
Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Communications Network See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
- If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Module Configuration
Principles Of Operation
Module Configuration
Principles of Operation
Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many
unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a
repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the
settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in incorrect
operation and/or DTCs setting.
The following are the 3 different methods of configuration:
- Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
- Module reprogramming ("flashing")
- Programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.
Definition of Terms
The following are definitions of configuration terms:
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI
process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session
is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may
prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually
selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is
available. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) See: Service and
Repair.
NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to
removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order
to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning
Module Reprogramming
Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the
strategy/calibration in a module. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not
improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. Module reprogramming is automatically
carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available.
NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published TSB
procedure recommends doing so.
NOTE: A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while
being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other
modules during the reprogramming process.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) programming is a process that updates the APIM
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) and Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) software. The VIP
programming updates the calibration files in the portion of the APIM which interfaces with the
Controller
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2567
Area Network (CAN). The CIP programming updates calibration files in the portion of the APIM that
interfaces with mobile phones and other customer devices.
APIM programming uses the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) to read and program the VIP
software through the Data Link Connector (DLC). A web-based On-Line Automotive Service
Information System (OASIS) application is used to read and program the CIP software via a
Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable between the scan tool and vehicle USB port. Both the VCM and
OASIS application must be running on the scan tool during APIM programming. To carry out APIM
programming, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming See:
Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming.
Programmable Parameters
Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via
scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle
Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these
options are programmable parameters.
Adaptive Learning and Calibration
Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair
procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
Transmission Identification Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a transmission identification block. The PCM
transmission identification block stores solenoid body flow data. If the solenoid body information is
not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block
commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), tire
size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with speed control.
Module Address
A unique module address is assigned to each module on the network for identification.
As-Built Data
As-Built data is a VIN-specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration
from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect
customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to
be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured.
NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This
data may be accessed from the technician service publication website.
The following chart lists As-Built data addresses and describes specific module configuration
information:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2568
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2569
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2570
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 1)
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid (Part 2)
Inspection And Verification
Module Configuration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2571
Inspection and Verification
This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the Programmable Module
Installation (PMI) procedures when another diagnostic/repair information directs to carry out
configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present: See: Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2572
Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Communications Network
Communications Network
DTC Charts
NOTE: Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as faulty wiring or
low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle service procedures such as module
reprogramming will often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is
unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network
wiring, especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery, refer to Battery.
NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character
failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as
opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status
code suffix to assist in determining DTC history.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2573
U0001-U0114
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2574
U0114:00-U0151:87
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2575
U0151:88-U0162:00
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2576
U0163-U0255
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2577
U0255:00-U0423:00
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2578
U261A-U3000:88
Module Configuration
Module Configuration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2579
B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U201A:51-U0300:51
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2580
U2050-U3002:62
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2581
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Communications Network
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2582
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2583
Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 24 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 3.0L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the
network connection to the PCM. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuit CBB28 (GY/VT) or
SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- IC
- PCM
- RCM
- PSCM
- OCSM
- TCM (Hybrid only)
- BCM (Hybrid only)
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN MODULES PASS
THE NETWORK TEST
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- In the left hand pane of the IDS network test display screen, verify whether any HS-CAN modules
passed the network test.
- Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): 4x4 control
module, ABS module, Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), Battery Control Module (BCM),
Instrument Cluster (IC), Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Power Steering Control
Module (PSCM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) or PCM?
Yes
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present. Go To
Pinpoint Test R to diagnose an intermittent HS-CAN fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R:
Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication
Can Be Intermittently
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2584
No
No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN. Go To Pinpoint Test s to diagnose no
HS-CAN communication. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- A2 VERIFY COMPUTERS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
INFORMATION PINPOINT TEST QA HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT
- Verify that pinpoint test QA has been carried out.
- Has pinpoint test QA been carried out?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information, Pinpoint Tests, pinpoint test QA to
diagnose no communication with the PCM.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5.
No
GO to A4.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND
THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2585
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 42 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Vehicle Dynamic
Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits
CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
Hybrid
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the ABS module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits
CBP34 (VT/BN), CBK03 (GY), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit
GD113 (BK/YE) and GD120 (BK/GN) .
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2586
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ABS module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE ABS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows:
Escape And Mariner
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Escape and Mariner, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 18 (20A) and fuse 9 (50A) and
the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK,
refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Hybrid, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 27 (20A), 9 (50A) and 18 (20A) and the
Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 34 (5A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK,
refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows:
Escape And Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2587
Hybrid
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS
MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-12, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side
and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-13, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side
and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2588
- Disconnect the ABS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ABS module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 34 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Four Wheel
Drive Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The 4X4 control module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the network connection to the 4X4 control module. Voltage for the 4X4 control module is provided
by circuits CBP35 (YE/GY) and SBP11 (BU/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module
PINPOINT TEST C: THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE
SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the 4X4 control module C3184-4, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground; and between the 4X4 control module C3184-5, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness
side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2589
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 11 (10A) and 35 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-15, circuit GD182 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE 4X4
CONTROL MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU),
harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2590
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan
tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 60 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Instrument
Cluster for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Instrument Cluster (IC) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller
Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -)
provide the HS-CAN connection to the IC and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) connection to
the IC. Voltage for the IC is provided by circuits CBP29 (WH/VT), and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuits
GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU) provide ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2591
- IC
PINPOINT TEST D: THE IC DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- D1 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D4.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE IC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-9, circuit GD112 (BK/GN) harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK THE IC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the IC, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2592
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) or 43 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR
the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC
C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DLC
AND THE IC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2593
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D6.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D6 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2594
Normal Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the RCM. Voltage for the RCM is provided by
circuits CBP31 (BN/OG) and the RCM is case grounded.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- RCM
PINPOINT TEST E: THE RCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
------------------------------------------------- E1 CHECK THE RCM CONNECTION
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
- Disconnect: RCM C2041a.
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b.
- Are RCM C2041a and C2041b pins OK?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
REPAIR the RCM connector pins as necessary. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E2 CHECK THE RCM CASE GROUND FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the metal RCM case and a good chassis ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
REPAIR the case ground connection. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E3 CHECK THE RCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Repower the SRS. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the RCM C2041a-13, circuit CBP31 (BN/OG), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2595
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-10, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the RCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2596
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new RCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) communicates with the scan tool through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05
(WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the OCSM. Voltage for the OCSM is provided
by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and circuit GD183 (BK/WH) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- OCSM
PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- F1 CHECK THE OCSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the OCSM C3285-1, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2597
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F2 CHECK THE OCSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-14, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCSM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-18, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2598
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to F4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F4 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the OCSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new OCSM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 43 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Steering
Controls for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High
Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the PSCM. Voltage for the Power Steering Control
Module (PSCM) is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY) and circuit GD116 (BK/VT) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- PSCM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2599
PINPOINT TEST G: THE PSCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- G1 CHECK THE PSCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: PSCM C1463a (Escape and Mariner) or C2231a (Hybrid).
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the PSCM C1463a-1 or C2231a-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to G2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- G2 CHECK THE PSCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: PSCM C1463b (Escape and Mariner) or C2231b (Hybrid).
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C1463b-2 or C2231b-2, circuit GD116 (BK/VT),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- G3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PSCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C1463a-2 or C2231b-2, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU),
harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2600
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C1463a-3 or C2231b-3, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to G4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- G4 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PSCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering column assembly. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 29 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Transmission
Controls for schematic and connector information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2601
See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The TCM
communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network
connection to the TCM. Voltage for the TCM is provided by circuits CBB24 (VT/GN) and SBB05
(GY/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD121 (BK/YE).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- TCM
PINPOINT TEST H: THE TCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- H1 CHECK THE TCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the TCM, harness side and ground as follows:
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 5 (10A) or fuse 24 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- H2 CHECK THE TCM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the TCM harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2602
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to H3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- H3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE TCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-1, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-7, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to H4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- H4 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the TCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the TCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2603
Yes
INSTALL a new TCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.3L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Control Module (BCM) is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The BCM communicates
with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04
(WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the BCM.
Voltage for the BCM is provided by circuits CBB23 (BN/YE), SBB05 (GY/RD) and SBB15
(WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD182 (BK/GY) and GD149 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- BCM
PINPOINT TEST I: THE BCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE BCM
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2604
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (10A), fuse 26 (20A), and fuse 15 (50A) are OK. If
OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the
possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE BCM GROUNDS
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows:
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to I3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE BCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-29, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2605
- Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-28, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to I4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect the BCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the BCM connectors and make they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
-------------------------------------------------
Pinpoint Test J: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test J: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 10 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Grounds for
schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed
Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2606
(GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the
SJB. Voltage for the SJB is provided directly from the internal SJB busbar through SJB fuse 5
(10A). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: THE SJB DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- J1 CHECK THE SJB FUSE FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the voltage between the back of the SJB fuse 5 (10A) terminals (both sides) and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 5 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-8, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground; and between the SJB C2280d-12, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2607
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to J4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: -
corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2608
Pinpoint Test K: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Audio Control Module (ACM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed
Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG)
(MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ACM. Voltage for the ACM is provided by circuit
SBP39 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ACM
PINPOINT TEST K: THE ACM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- K1 CHECK THE ACM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ACM C240a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the ACM C240a-1, circuit SBP39 (WH/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to K2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 39 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE ACM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240a-13, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2609
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: ACM C240b.
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-15, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-16, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to K4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2610
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 55 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Automatic
Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The HVAC module communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -)
provide the network connection to the HVAC module. Voltage to the HVAC module is provided by
circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) and circuit CBP37 (WH). Ground is provided by circuit GD114 (BK/BU).
NOTE: The Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) HVAC module does not communicate
with the scan tool.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST L: THE HVAC MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- L1 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC).
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the HVAC module C2356a-12 or C2357a-12, circuit CBP37 (WH),
harness side and ground and between the HVAC module C2356a-13 or C2357a-13, circuit SBP15
(WH/RD) harness side and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to L2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 15 (10A) or fuse 37 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2611
Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- L2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-23 or C2357a-23, circuit GD114
(BK/BU), harness side and ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to L3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- L3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HVAC
MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-25 or C2357a-25, circuit VDB06
(GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-26 or C2357a-26, circuit VDB07
(VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to L4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- L4 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2612
- Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new HVAC module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test M: The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Does Not Respond
To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test M: The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Does Not Respond
To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System
for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module communicates with the scan tool
through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG)
(MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the SDARS
module. Voltage to the SDARS module is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided
by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- SDARS module
PINPOINT TEST M: THE SDARS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- M1 CHECK THE SDARS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SDARS Module C3290.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the SDARS module C3290-9, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side
and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2613
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to M2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- M2 CHECK THE SDARS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the SDARS module C3290-3, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to M3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- M3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE
SDARS MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the SDARS module C3290-1, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness
side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the SDARS module C3290-7, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness
side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2614
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to M4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- M4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SDARS MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SDARS module connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SDARS module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SDARS module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium
Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the front display interface module. Voltage
to the FDIM is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD114 (BK/BU).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- FDIM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2615
PINPOINT TEST N: THE FDIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- N1 CHECK THE FDIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the FDIM C2123-12, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to N2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- N2 CHECK THE FDIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-8, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and
ground.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to N3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- N3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FDIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-4, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG),
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2616
harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-5, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to N4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- N4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FDIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FDIM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2617
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium
Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the FCIM. Voltage to the FCIM is provided
by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- FCIM
PINPOINT TEST O: THE FCIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- O1 CHECK THE FCIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the FCIM C2402-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to O2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- O2 CHECK THE FCIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-2, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2618
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to O3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- O3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FCIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-4, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to O4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- O4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FCIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2619
Yes
INSTALL a new FCIM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test P: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test P: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) communicates with the scan tool through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05
(WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN connection to the APIM. Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN
+) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the MS-CAN connection to the APIM. Voltage for the
APIM is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Circuit GD103 (BK/BU) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- APIM
PINPOINT TEST P: THE APIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- P1 CHECK THE APIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: APIM C3338.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the APIM C3338-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to P2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2620
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 13 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, REFER to
the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P2 CHECK THE APIM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-37, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground; and between the APIM C3338-38, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to P3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-53, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-54, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to P4.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2621
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P4 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-16, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-17, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to P5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P5 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Or No ISO
9141 Network Communication
Communications Network
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2622
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Q: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool or No ISO
9141 network communication
Normal Operation
The Parking Aid Module (PAM) communicates with the scan tool through the ISO 9141
communications network, circuit VDB10 (GY). The PAM is the only module which communicates
on the ISO 9141. Voltage for the PAM is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). Ground is provided by
circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- PAM
PINPOINT TEST Q: THE PAM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL OR NO ISO 9141
NETWORK COMMUNICATION
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Q1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect the DLC pin 7 for damage.
- Is the DLC pin 7 OK?
Yes
GO to Q2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q2 CHECK THE PAM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: PAM C4014.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the PAM C4014-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2623
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Q3.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q3 CHECK THE ISO 9141 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-7, circuit VDB10 (GY), harness side and ground.
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
GO to Q4.
------------------------------------------------- Q4 CHECK THE PAM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-4, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to Q5.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2624
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q5 CHECK THE ISO 9141 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-7, circuit VDB10 (GY), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to Q6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q6 CHECK THE ISO 9141 COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE PAM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-8, circuit VDB10 (GY), harness side and the
DLC C251-7, circuit VDB10 (GY), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to Q7.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q7 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
- Disconnect the PAM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PAM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2625
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test R: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication,
Communication Can Be Intermittently
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test R: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication,
Communication Can Be Intermittently Established
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits
VDB04 (WH/BU) and VDB05 (WH). In the event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (HS-CAN + or
HS-CAN -) becomes open to a module on the network, unreliable network communication to all
modules on the network may result.
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (Hybrid only)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (Hybrid only)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST R: INTERMITTENT NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN
BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED
NOTE: Various modules will set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear the DTCs from all
modules after the diagnostic procedure is complete.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- R1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect DLC pins 6 and 14 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK?
Yes
GO to R2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2626
------------------------------------------------- R2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to R3.
No
Go To Pinpoint Test S. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- R3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the battery negative cable. GO to R4.
No
Go To Pinpoint Test S. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- R4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2627
GO to R5.
------------------------------------------------- R5 CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH
THE PCM DISABLED
NOTE: An Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) session must be established prior to disabling the
PCM in this test step. If the PCM has failed communication during multiple attempts to identify the
vehicle, first identify the vehicle manually by entering a PCM part number, calibration number or
tear tag when prompted by IDS.
NOTE: When a vehicle is manually identified by a PCM part number, calibration number or tear
tag, the IDS will not automatically run a network test. The network test must be manually selected
and run.
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuses 5 (10A) and 29 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
Go To Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
For Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid, INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to R6.
For Escape and Mariner, INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to R7.
------------------------------------------------- R6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE BCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: BJB Fuses 26 (20A) and 8 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test I. See: Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control
Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to R7.
------------------------------------------------- R7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE PSCM AND 4X4 CONTROL MODULE (IF EQUIPPED) DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 35 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To
Pinpoint Test G. See: Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not
Respond To The Scan Tool
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2628
If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to R8.
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to R9.
------------------------------------------------- R8 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the 4x4 control module. Go To Pinpoint Test C. See: Pinpoint Test C: The 4X4 Control
Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the 4x4 control module. Go To Pinpoint Test G. See: Pinpoint Test G: The Power
Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
------------------------------------------------- R9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE RCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 31 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test E. See: Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control
Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to R10.
------------------------------------------------- R10 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE OCSM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 46 (7.5A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test F. See: Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
GO to R11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2629
------------------------------------------------- R11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) and 43 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To Pinpoint Test D. See: Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster
(IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), INSTALL the
removed fuses. GO to R12.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to R13.
------------------------------------------------- R12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test P. See: Pinpoint Test P: The Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
GO to R13.
------------------------------------------------- R13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS MODULE DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 34 (5A) (Escape and Mariner) or Fuse 27 (10A) (Hybrid).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does
Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
If the vehicle is not a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV), INSTALL the removed fuse. An intermittent
fault is not present. Go To Pinpoint Test S. See: Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
If the vehicle is an HEV, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to R14.
------------------------------------------------- R14 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE HEV TCM DISABLED
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2630
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: BJB Fuses 5 (10A) and 24 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To Pinpoint Test H. See: Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission
Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. Go To Pinpoint Test S. See:
Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------S1-S20
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits
VDB04 (WH/BU) and VDB05 (WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (Hybrid only)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (Hybrid only)
PINPOINT TEST S: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- S1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2631
- Ignition OFF.
- Inspect DLC pins 6 and 14 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK?
Yes
GO to S2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to S3.
No
GO to S5.
------------------------------------------------- S3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S4.
No
GO to S21.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2632
S4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The HS-CAN has tested within specifications. Go To Pinpoint Test R to test for an intermittent
network fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently
------------------------------------------------- S5 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to S6.
No
GO to S9.
------------------------------------------------- S6 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to S7.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2633
GO to S8.
------------------------------------------------- S7 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S31.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S8 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC
C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2634
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S37.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S9 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S11.
No
GO to S10.
------------------------------------------------- S10 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN AT
THE DLC
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test.
------------------------------------------------- S11 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2635
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S12.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S31.
------------------------------------------------- S12 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to S13.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to S14.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S32.
------------------------------------------------- S13 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S14.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S33.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2636
S14 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH
THE RCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S34.
------------------------------------------------- S15 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE OCSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to S16.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to S17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S35.
------------------------------------------------ S16 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2637
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S36.
------------------------------------------------- S17 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S18.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S37.
------------------------------------------------- S18 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PSCM C1463a (Escape and Mariner) or C2231a (Hybrid).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV), GO to S19.
If the vehicle is not an HEV, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative
battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S38.
------------------------------------------------- S19 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2638
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to S20.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S39.
------------------------------------------------- S20 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S40.
-----------------------------------------------S21-S40
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test S: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2639
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits
VDB04 (WH/BU) and VDB05 (WH).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (Hybrid only)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (Hybrid only)
PINPOINT TEST S: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- S21 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S31.
No
GO to S22.
------------------------------------------------- S22 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2640
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S32.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to S23.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to S24.
------------------------------------------------- S23 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S33.
No
GO to S24.
------------------------------------------------- S24 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE RCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S34.
No
GO to S25.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2641
S25 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH
THE OCSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S35.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to S26.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to S27.
------------------------------------------------- S26 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S36.
No
GO to S27.
------------------------------------------------- S27 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S37.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2642
No
GO to S28.
------------------------------------------------- S28 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PSCM C1463a (Escape and Mariner) or C2231a (Hybrid).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S38.
No
If the vehicle is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV), GO to S29.
If the vehicle is not an HEV, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative
battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S29 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S39.
No
GO to S30.
------------------------------------------------- S30 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2643
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to S40.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S31 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S32 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect the ABS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ABS module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2644
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S33 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S34 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the RCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new RCM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S35 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the OCSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new OCSM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2645
------------------------------------------------- S36 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. REPOWER the SRS. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S37 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S38 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PSCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering column assembly. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S39 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2646
- Disconnect the TCM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the TCM and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new TCM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S40 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect the BCM low voltage connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the BCM low voltage connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
-------------------------------------------------
Pinpoint Test T: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test T: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently Established
Normal Operation
The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable.
Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) and VDB07 (VT/OG) provide the network connection to all modules on
the network. In the event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (MS-CAN + or MS-CAN -) becomes open
to a module on the network, unreliable network communication to all modules on the network may
result.
The following modules communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN:
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- HVAC module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2647
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST T: INTERMITTENT NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN
BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED
NOTE: Various modules will set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear DTCs from all
modules after the diagnostic procedure is completed.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- T1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK?
Yes
GO to T2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- T2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to T3.
No
Go To Pinpoint Test U. See: Pinpoint Test U: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- T3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2648
VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T4.
No
Go To Pinpoint Test U. See: Pinpoint Test U: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- T4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground;
and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
GO to T5.
------------------------------------------------- T5 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE SJB DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 5 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test J. See: Pinpoint Test J: The Smart Junction Box
(SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to T6.
------------------------------------------------- T6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE HVAC MODULE DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2649
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 37 (10A) and 15 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To Pinpoint Test L. See: Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does
Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to T7.
------------------------------------------------- T7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 39 (20A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test K. See: Pinpoint Test K: The Audio Control
Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), INSTALL the
removed fuse. GO to T8.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to T9.
------------------------------------------------- T8 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To Pinpoint Test P. See: Pinpoint Test P: The Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to T9.
------------------------------------------------- T9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM, FDIM AND/OR SDARS MODULE DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 14 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2650
Yes
For vehicles equipped with an FDIM only, INSTALL the removed fuse. Go To Pinpoint Test N. See:
Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
For vehicles also equipped with an FCIM and/or a SDARS module, INSTALL the removed fuse.
GO to T10.
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to T13.
------------------------------------------------- T10 VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - FCIM
- Inspect the vehicle for an FCIM.
- Is the vehicle equipped with an FCIM?
Yes
GO to T11.
No
GO to T12.
------------------------------------------------- T11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the FCIM. Go To Pinpoint Test O. See: Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface
Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the FCIM. GO to T12.
------------------------------------------------- T12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE SDARS MODULE DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SDARS Module C3290.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the SDARS module. Go To Pinpoint Test M. See: Pinpoint Test M: The Satellite Digital
Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the SDARS module. Go To Pinpoint Test N. See: Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display
Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2651
------------------------------------------------- T13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display will revert back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) and 43 (10A).
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. Go To Pinpoint Test D. See: Pinpoint Test D: The Instrument Cluster
(IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. Go To Pinpoint Test U. See:
Pinpoint Test U: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test U: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test U: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable.
Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) and VDB07 (VT/OG) provide the network connection to all modules on
the network.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- HVAC module
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
PINPOINT TEST U: PINPOINT TEST U: NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE
NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- U1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2652
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK?
Yes
GO to U2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to U3.
No
GO to U5.
------------------------------------------------- U3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U4.
No
GO to U19.
------------------------------------------------- U4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2653
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground;
and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The CAN has tested within specifications. Go To Pinpoint Test T to diagnose the intermittent
MS-CAN fault. See: Pinpoint Test T: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent
------------------------------------------------- U5 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to U6.
No
GO to U9.
------------------------------------------------- U6 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to U7.
No
GO to U8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2654
------------------------------------------------- U7 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U27.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U8 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2655
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U34.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U9 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to U11.
No
GO to U10.
------------------------------------------------- U10 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the
negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test.
------------------------------------------------- U11 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2656
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module, GO to
U12.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a SDARS module, GO to U13.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U27.
------------------------------------------------- U12 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE SDARS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SDARS Module C3290.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to U13.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U28.
------------------------------------------------- U13 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to U14.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to U15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U29.
------------------------------------------------- U14 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2657
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to U15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U30.
------------------------------------------------- U15 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACM C240b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to U16.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to U17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U31.
------------------------------------------------- U16 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to U17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U32.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2658
U17 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH
THE HVAC MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to U18.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U33.
------------------------------------------------- U18 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U34.
------------------------------------------------- U19 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U27.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2659
If the vehicle is equipped with a Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module, GO to
U20.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a SDARS module, GO to U21.
------------------------------------------------- U20 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE SDARS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SDARS Module C3290.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U28.
No
GO to U21.
------------------------------------------------- U21 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U29.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to U22.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to U23.
------------------------------------------------- U22 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2660
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U30.
No
GO to U23.
------------------------------------------------- U23 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACM C240b.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U31.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to U24.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to U25.
------------------------------------------------- U24 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U32.
No
GO to U25.
------------------------------------------------- U25 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE HVAC MODULE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2661
DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U33.
No
GO to U26.
------------------------------------------------- U26 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U34.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U27 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2662
------------------------------------------------- U28 CHECK FOR CORRECT SDARS MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the SDARS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the SDARS module connector and make it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SDARS module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U29 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FDIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FDIM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U30 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FCIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FCIM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U31 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2663
- Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U32 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U33 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors.
- Check for: -
corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new HVAC module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U34 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2664
- corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test V: No Power To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test V: No Power To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The scan tool is connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC) to communicate with the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN), Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN), and ISO
9141 communications network. Voltage for the scan tool is provided by circuit SBP20 (GN/RD).
Ground is provided by circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DLC
PINPOINT TEST V: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Communications Network/Inspection And Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- V1 CHECK DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 for damage.
- Are the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 OK?
Yes
GO to V2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2665
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V2 CHECK THE DLC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-16, circuit SBP20 (GN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to V3.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 20 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V3 CHECK THE DLC GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-4, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-5, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the scan tool. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2666
Information Bus: Programming and Relearning
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Not Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2667
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS)
NOTE: If a new Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) is being installed, install the new
APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software
levels.
8. NOTE: Do not disconnect the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) or USB cables during
APIM programming.
Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the
"Program APIM" button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
- When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
9. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays "Programming
has been completed successfully".
10. Test the audio system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2668
Information Bus: Service and Repair
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Not Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2672
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2673
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2674
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled as International Standards
Organization (ISO) engine symbol.
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the key is in the ON or START position.
- The MIL remains on in the on/start mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster prove-out
for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: the PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC is set.
- the instrument cluster illuminates the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- If the MIL remains off during the bulb check, there is: an instrument cluster concern.
- an instrument cluster wiring concern.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For any MIL concern, refer to Symptom Charts, GO to Quick Test QT1 See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/QT : Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)/Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Quick Test .
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2684
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2685
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to
the absolute pressure in the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor is part of the EGR system. The PCM uses information from the MAP, TP, MAF,
CHT and CKP sensors to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2686
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
3. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
4. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2695
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 >
Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 >
Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2701
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2704
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 > Page 2707
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2708
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2711
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2712
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque-Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an
accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics:
- The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires two
wires).
- An internal spring is used to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is
typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also two throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing
voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage).
The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle
angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components See:
Description and Operation/Engine Control Components.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize the fuel control while delivering the
requested torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2717
ECT System Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
a Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register
a concern.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to
register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Testing
and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2718
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
a Correlation and range/performance - sensor disagreement between processors internal to the
PCM, TP inconsistent with requested throttle plate position. Monitor execution is continuous.
Monitor false detection duration is less than 1 second to register a concern. Refer to Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Charts and Descriptions See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble
Code Descriptions for additional DTC information.
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
a Note: For all DTCs, in addition to the MIL, the powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) is on for
the concern that caused the FMEM action. Monitor execution is continuous. Monitor false detection
duration is less than 5 seconds to register a concern.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page
2727
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 2732
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2738
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 >
Page 2743
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2744
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2745
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2746
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2747
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2748
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2749
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2750
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2751
Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2752
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2753
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the
VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing
PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to carry out this procedure correctly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio
out of Acceptable Range. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of
functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel
octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, and the presence of speed control. Only
items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan
tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Reprogramming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and
the second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it is replaced.
Manual data entry must be carried out if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out
the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make certain
that all parameters are included. Failure to correctly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) or axle ratio, may result in codes
P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As Built data center for the information
needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM
cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact the
National Hotline or Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As Built data. Non-Ford
technicians, use the Motorcraft website at Motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft homepage, use the
search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
PCM Reprogramming
Note: After the PCM is successfully reprogrammed, clear any TCM DTCs that may have been
stored during reprogramming.
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2756
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal. Install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2764
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2765
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2769
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2770
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2771
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2775
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2776
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2777
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2781
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2782
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2783
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2784
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2785
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2789
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2790
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which the resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
then initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software See: Description and
Operation/Powertrain Control Software Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2791
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2796
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2797
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2798
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2799
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2800
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module. For additional information, refer to Fuel Pump Module
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair/Fuel Pump Module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the locking tabs and remove the fuel level sender
from the FP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2801
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2805
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
In-line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2809
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2810
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is integrated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. It is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying
resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to
the PCM corresponding to temperature.
A thermistor type sensor is considered a passive sensor. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
the total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, and ignition timing.
Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2814
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2815
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2816
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2821
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to
the absolute pressure in the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor is part of the EGR system. The PCM uses information from the MAP, TP, MAF,
CHT and CKP sensors to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2822
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the Throttle Body (TB).
3. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
4. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page
2831
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2837
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 2840
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#12 > Page 2843
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2844
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2847
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2848
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2858
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
Overview
The intake phase shifting (IPS) VCT system enables rotation of the intake camshaft relative to the
crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions.
The VCT system has several operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and
default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module
(PCM) determines the phase angle based on a constant angle, limited by engine oil temperature
and engine RPM. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on
engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced
engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved
torque.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank.
A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), cylinder head temperature
(CHT), CMP, accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor (via requested torque), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating
conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the
camshaft position based on engine oil temperature and engine speed inputs. During cold start
emissions reduction mode, the camshaft position is determined via engine speed and estimates of
engine coolant temperature and catalyst temperature (estimated from other sensors already used
such as IAT/CHT/MAF/CKP). During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and accelerator pedal position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating oil temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met.
3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning.
4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the
flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 2872
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Catalytic
Converter Mounting Gasket: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page
2878
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard Start/DTC's Set
Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Rough Running/Hard Start/DTC's Set
TSB 11-1-5
01/25/11
RUNS ROUGH, HARD START AFTER REFUELING, AUDIBLE CLICKING NOISE UNDER
HOOD, AND/OR DTCS P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X, BUILT ON OR BEFORE
11/1/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2010 F-150 2009-2011 E-Series, Escape, Expedition 2011 F-250,
F-350
LINCOLN: 2011 MKZ 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 F-150, 2009-2011 Expedition, Navigator, E-Series, Escape Hybrid,
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid and F-Super Duty
250/350 equipped with a 6.2L engine and built on or before 11/1/2010, may exhibit a running rough
concern, hard start after refueling, audible clicking noise under the hood and/or diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard Start/DTC's Set > Page 2888
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110105A 2009-2011 Expedition, 0.6 Hr.
Navigator, And Econoline 2009-2010 F-150: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission
Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Escape Hybrid, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid, And 2011 F-Super Duty
6.2L: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Econoline: 0.9 Hr.
Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard Start/DTC's Set
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Rough Running/Hard
Start/DTC's Set
TSB 11-1-5
01/25/11
RUNS ROUGH, HARD START AFTER REFUELING, AUDIBLE CLICKING NOISE UNDER
HOOD, AND/OR DTCS P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X, BUILT ON OR BEFORE
11/1/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2010 F-150 2009-2011 E-Series, Escape, Expedition 2011 F-250,
F-350
LINCOLN: 2011 MKZ 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 F-150, 2009-2011 Expedition, Navigator, E-Series, Escape Hybrid,
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid and F-Super Duty
250/350 equipped with a 6.2L engine and built on or before 11/1/2010, may exhibit a running rough
concern, hard start after refueling, audible clicking noise under the hood and/or diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard Start/DTC's Set > Page 2894
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110105A 2009-2011 Expedition, 0.6 Hr.
Navigator, And Econoline 2009-2010 F-150: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission
Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Escape Hybrid, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid, And 2011 F-Super Duty
6.2L: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Econoline: 0.9 Hr.
Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2895
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2896
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the
PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold
during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve.
The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors electronically by way of a solenoid,
eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs
a duty cycle between 0% and 100% to control the EVAP canister purge valve.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2897
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the EVAP canister purge valve.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2901
Evaporative Check Valve: Description and Operation
Fuel Vapor Vent Valve
The fuel vapor vent valve is a PCM-controlled solenoid that isolates the fuel tank from the rest of
the EVAP system. The fuel vapor vent valve is a normally open valve allowing the flow of vapors
from the fuel tank to the electronic EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP canister. The PCM
controls the fuel vapor vent valve on/off cycle whenever it is desired to isolate the fuel tank from the
rest of the EVAP system.
Fuel Vapor Vent Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair
Fuel Vapor Vent Valve
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister See: Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the fuel vapor vent-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling.
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor vent valve electrical connector.
4. Remove the fuel vapor vent valve from the EVAP canister tray.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Position the Powertrain Lift under the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2909
4. Remove the LH fuel tank strap bolt and position the strap aside.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
5. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly.
6. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling.
8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel vapor vent valve quick connect coupling.
9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2913
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2914
Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation
Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP
canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the
target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor.
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2915
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2916
1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister See:
Evaporative Emission Control Canister/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid and fuel vapor vent valve electrical connectors,
release the pin-type retainer and remove the EVAP
canister wire harness.
3. Remove the 3 EVAP canister tray bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling.
5. Disconnect the fuel vapor vent valve-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling.
6. Remove the EVAP canister from the tray.
7. Depress the locking tab outward, rotate the EVAP canister vent solenoid clockwise and remove
it from the EVAP canister.
- Apply clean engine oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2921
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2922
EGR Valve: Description and Operation
Electric Exhaust Recirculation Valve (EEGR) Valve
The EEGR valve is a water-cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52
discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate
of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the valve against the motor opening force.
EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2923
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Coolant Outlet
EGR Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2924
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
3. Release the clamp and remove the upper radiator hose from the coolant outlet.
4. Release the clamp and remove the coolant bypass hose from the coolant outlet.
5. Release the clamp and remove the heater hose from the coolant outlet.
6. Remove the 4 bolts and the coolant outlet and gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector.
8. Release the clamp and remove the coolant hose from the EGR valve.
9. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
10. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces
of the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve gasket.
NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and
prepare the surfaces
NOTE: Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket.
Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket. Clean and inspect the EGR gasket mating surfaces.
11. NOTE: Install a new EGR valve and coolant outlet gaskets.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the intake manifold.
2. Release the coolant bypass hose from the clip.
3. Remove the 8 bolts, the crankcase vent oil separator and gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Clean and inspect the crankcase oil vent separator gasket and replace if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 2933
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 2934
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 1072 RPM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal
2.5L and 3.0L Vehicles
2.5L Hybrid Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2944
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: The accelerator pedal and sensor assembly on the 2.5L and 3.0L are similar in appearance
to the 2.5L Hybrid but are not interchangeable.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2.5L and 3.0L vehicles
2. Remove the 3 self-tapping screws and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
2.5L Hybrid vehicles
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
All vehicles
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2948
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2949
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers
and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2954
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2958
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2959
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2960
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
Spring Lock Couplings
Disconnect
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube spring lock coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling.
4. Insert the Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock
coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2973
5. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube.
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling.
- Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil.
2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated.
3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube.
4. Install the safety clip onto the spring lock coupling.
5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2974
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling
Quick Connect Coupling
Disconnect - Type I
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from
the tube.
Connect - Type I
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2975
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type II
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2976
Connect - Type II
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting.
2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the
fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Release the lock tab into the latched position.
3. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type III
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2977
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage.
Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab.
4. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully unlocked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to
release the locking mechanism.
5. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type III
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing.
Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2978
3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling.
Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position.
4. Connect the battery ground cable.
Disconnect - Type IV
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearance. It
is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism.
4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2979
Connect - Type IV
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
2. Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2987
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Early build 3.0L engines are equipped with a Schrader valve on the fuel rail. Late build 3.0L
engines do not have a Schrader valve.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with early build 3.0L engine
5. Remove the fuel rail Schrader valve cap.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2988
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit to the fuel rail Schrader valve.
Vehicles with late build 3.0L engine
7. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
8. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
All vehicles
9. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure
and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP fuse.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
11. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
12. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2992
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Fuel Pump (FP) control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may
ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel quick connect coupling.
4. Disconnect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors.
5. Remove the nut and position the radio capacitor aside.
6. Detach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the 2 fuel rail stud bolts.
8. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
9. Remove the 4 fuel injector retainer clips and the 4 fuel injectors.
- Remove and discard the 8 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do
not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: Install 8 new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the 4 fuel injectors and the 4 retainer clips on the fuel rail.
2. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
3. Install the 2 fuel rail stud bolts.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Attach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers to the fuel rail.
5. Position the radio capacitor and install the nut.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 2997
6. Connect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors.
7. Connect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling.
8. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 2998
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail
Fuel Injector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 2999
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3004
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3005
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3006
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the fuel system pressure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3007
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Remove the front and rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure.
Upon disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes,
carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel supply jumper tube-to-fuel supply tube quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling.
7. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
9. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge tube-to-vapor tube quick connect
coupling (part of 9E857).
10. Release the 7 fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel supply and vapor tubes.
11. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister.
12. Release the 4 pin-type retainer clips and remove the fresh air tube.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3013
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3014
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3015
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
5. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. Remove the LR wheel and tire.
7. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable
container.
Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
9. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3019
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3022
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3023
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3024
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3025
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Tank Unit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Tank Unit > Page 3031
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3032
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and
FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3036
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3037
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs,
the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which
opens the electrical contacts of the switch. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the
location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3038
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner (ACL) Assembly and Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner (ACL) Intake Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3043
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3044
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray.
2. Remove the bolt and the Air Cleaner (ACL) intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3045
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not disconnect the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe from the ACL cover. This is to protect
the integrity of the hydrocarbon trap.
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the ACL outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 ACL cover clamps.
4. Loosen the ACL outlet pipe-to-Throttle Body (TB) clamp and remove the ACL outlet pipe and
ACL cover assembly.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
5. NOTE: The ACL outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering
the engine.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3053
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the Fuel Pump (FP) control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
Intake Air Resonator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LF wheel and tire.
3. Remove the 9 fasteners and position aside the LH fender splash shield.
4. Remove the bolt and the air intake resonator.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Make sure that the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3064
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3065
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
There are two pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The two
pedal position signals make sure the powertrain control module (PCM) receives a correct input
even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where
it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other
input is used. There are two reference voltage circuits, two signal return circuits, and two signal
circuits (a total of six circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position (TP) sensor. The
pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software
then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers
and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
2-Track APP Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3069
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3070
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the volume of air
flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake
air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch consists of a steel cone held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs,
the cone breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which
opens the electrical contacts of the switch. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the
location of the IFS switch.
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Typical Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3080
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3092
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-8-9 > May > 09 > Fuel System - Red Triangle
Displayed/DTC P1A0C
Throttle Body: Customer Interest Fuel System - Red Triangle Displayed/DTC P1A0C
TSB 09-8-9
05/04/09
RED TRIANGLE ON AND STOP SAFELY NOW MESSAGE - DTC P1A0C
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit an
intermittent Red Triangle On and Stop Safely Now message displayed on the message center
accompanied by a sudden RPM loss/no start symptom with a diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
P1A0C. Vehicles may exhibit this symptom on the first start of the morning or after an extended
idle. The symptom will clear on the next key cycle.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
For vehicles outside the new vehicle limited warranty, if diagnostics lead to replacing the throttle
body you may use this procedure to clean the throttle body as an alternative to replacing it.
This procedure is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
NOTE
THIS CLEANING PROCEDURE CAN ONLY BE USED ON NON-COATED THROTTLE BODIES.
Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-04C Removal and Installation - Throttle Body.
1. Remove the throttle body.
2. With the throttle body positioned to the side, open the throttle plate.
3. Using Motorcraft(R) Choke and Linkage Cleaner or equivalent, spray the throttle body plate and
bore.
4. Using a suitable (nylon) brush, clean the edges of the throttle plate and the mating surface of the
throttle bore to remove all carbon build up.
5. Reapply Motorcraft® Choke and Linkage Cleaner or equivalent and wipe clean with a lint-free
cloth.
6. Remove old throttle body gasket and discard. Install a new throttle body gasket.
7. Install the throttle body.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3102
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-8-9 > May > 09 > Fuel System - Red
Triangle Displayed/DTC P1A0C
Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Red Triangle Displayed/DTC P1A0C
TSB 09-8-9
05/04/09
RED TRIANGLE ON AND STOP SAFELY NOW MESSAGE - DTC P1A0C
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit an
intermittent Red Triangle On and Stop Safely Now message displayed on the message center
accompanied by a sudden RPM loss/no start symptom with a diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
P1A0C. Vehicles may exhibit this symptom on the first start of the morning or after an extended
idle. The symptom will clear on the next key cycle.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
For vehicles outside the new vehicle limited warranty, if diagnostics lead to replacing the throttle
body you may use this procedure to clean the throttle body as an alternative to replacing it.
This procedure is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
NOTE
THIS CLEANING PROCEDURE CAN ONLY BE USED ON NON-COATED THROTTLE BODIES.
Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-04C Removal and Installation - Throttle Body.
1. Remove the throttle body.
2. With the throttle body positioned to the side, open the throttle plate.
3. Using Motorcraft(R) Choke and Linkage Cleaner or equivalent, spray the throttle body plate and
bore.
4. Using a suitable (nylon) brush, clean the edges of the throttle plate and the mating surface of the
throttle bore to remove all carbon build up.
5. Reapply Motorcraft® Choke and Linkage Cleaner or equivalent and wipe clean with a lint-free
cloth.
6. Remove old throttle body gasket and discard. Install a new throttle body gasket.
7. Install the throttle body.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 >
Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3117
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
Throttle Body
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the Throttle Body (TB).
- Discard the TB gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new TB gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has two signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle
position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the
second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The two ETB
throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has
a concern. There is one reference voltage circuit and one signal return circuit for the sensor. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to the
description of the Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) See: Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3126
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3130
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3131
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3132
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3136
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3137
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3138
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3139
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3140
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3145
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3147
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3148
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 3149
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
Coil On Plug (COP)
The COPs are part of the distributorless ignition system. They are the source of the high voltage
which is used to generate the spark by the spark plug. The hybrid vehicle uses four COPs, one for
each cylinder. The COPs are mounted directly onto the spark plugs. The function of the COP is to
convert low voltage into high voltage in excess of 40,000 volts.
The COP consists of primary and secondary windings. The primary winding is energized by the
IGN START/RUN circuit. The PCM coil driver circuit is connected to the primary winding as well.
The secondary winding is connected to the spark plug. The current flowing through the primary
winding generates the magnetic field across both windings. The PCM activates the coil driver
circuit by opening it. The instant the circuit opens the magnetic field collapses, inducing current flow
in the secondary winding.
The COP has three different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure
mode effects management (FMEM).
Typical Coil On Plug (COP)
Coil On Plug
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3152
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 4 ignition coil electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the 4 bolts and the ignition coils.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears. Remove and discard any damaged coil seals.
- To install, slide the new coil seal onto the coil until fully seated at the top of the coil.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to
the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3156
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3157
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3158
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3163
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3164
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and
used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The PCM also uses the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3165
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3169
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3170
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the
CKP sensor signal indicates the crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to
synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft
relative to a fixed reference. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has
occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between pulse wheel teeth.
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3171
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3172
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt in the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3173
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3181
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3182
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3183
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.08-1.18 mm (0.042-0.046 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap > Page 3188
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3189
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3190
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3191
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3194
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3201
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3209
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3210
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3211
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3212
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3213
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3214
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3215
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3216
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3217
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3218
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3219
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3220
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3221
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3222
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3223
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3224
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3225
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3226
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3227
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3228
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3229
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3230
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3231
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3232
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3233
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3239
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information >
Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3248
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3249
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3250
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL
ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 3259
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 3264
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 3270
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 3275
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3280
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3281
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3282
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3283
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3284
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3290
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3291
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3292
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3293
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
08-21-2 > Oct > 08 > Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 3294
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3301
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat
Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines >
Page 3307
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 3312
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3319
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3320
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3321
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3322
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3323
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3324
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3325
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3326
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control
Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3343
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - CVT: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacities
Transmission Fluid...............................................................................................................................
....................................................4.05L (4.28 quarts)*
Motor electronics cooling system.........................................................................................................
......................................................3.5L (3.7 quarts)**
* Note: Transmission filled for life. The correct transaxle fill level is to the bottom of the fill plug,
which is the upper plug.
** Note: Approximate dry fill capacity
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3348
Fluid - CVT: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name
- Mercon LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number
- XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification
- MERCON LV
Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may
cause internal transmission damage.
Ford Part Name
- Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
Ford Part Number
- VC-7-B (US) - CVC-7-A (Canada) - Or equivalent
Ford Specification
- WSS-M97B51-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid
Pump, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fluid Pump: Service and Repair
Motor Electronics Pump
1. Drain the motor electronics cooling system (MECS). For additional information, refer to See:
Service and Repair/Procedures
2. Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses.
^ Disconnect the harness connector.
3. Remove the bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3358
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3359
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3360
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3361
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3362
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3363
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3364
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3365
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3366
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3367
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3368
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3369
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3370
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3371
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3372
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3373
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3374
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3375
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3376
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3377
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3378
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3380
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3381
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays
and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3382
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH
Differential Seals - LH
Special Tools
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
5. Remove the LH halfshaft.
6. Using the Slide Hammer and Input Shaft Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the LH
differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Handle, install the LH
differential seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3387
2. Install the LH halfshaft.
3. Clean and drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
5. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the
bottom of the fill plug hole.
6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug for transmission fluid that may have spilled on the
transaxle case.
Install the fill plug. ^
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
NOTE: The transaxle fluid is checked and filled by removing the plug and adding fluid to the bottom
of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3388
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH
Differential Seals - RH
Special Tools
Material
Removal
ALL VEHICLES
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
FWD
5. Remove the intermediate shaft.
AWD
6. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU).
7. Using the Slide Hammer and RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Remover, remove and discard the RH
differential seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3389
Installation
1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Driver 32 Inch Handle,
install the RH differential seal.
AWD
2. Install the PTU.
FWD
3. Install the intermediate shaft.
ALL VEHICLES
4. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
6. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the
bottom of the fill plug hole.
7. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug for transmission fluid that may have spilled on the
transaxle case.
Install the fill plug. ^
Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
8. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
NOTE: The transaxle fluid is checked and filled by removing the plug and adding fluid to the bottom
of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3397
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3398
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3399
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The ignition must be in the OFF position to make sure that the Electronically Controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission
(eCVT) and the engine are OFF.
With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the selector lever in the D position.
3. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the transaxle selector lever cable splash shield.
5. Remove the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
6. Place the manual control lever in DRIVE by positioning the manual control lever between the 2
ribs on the transaxle case.
7. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock.
1. Pull out on the selector lever cable adjuster lock tabs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3404
2. Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable.
8. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever ball stud and install it with the
selector lever cable adjuster unlocked.
9. Slide the selector lever cable adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable.
10. To verify the correct adjustment, observe the selector lever on the transaxle while an assistant
shifts the transmission selector lever to each range
position, ending in the D position.
11. Install the transaxle selector lever cable splash shield.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
12. Install the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3405
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Cable
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: The ignition must be in the OFF position to make sure that the Electronically Controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission
(eCVT) and the engine are OFF.
With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the selector lever in the D position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3406
3. Gently pry up to remove the selector lever trim ring.
4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
5. Remove the top finish panel from the center console.
6. Disconnect the power outlet electrical connector.
7. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3407
8. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
9. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the dash panel.
10. Remove the selector lever cable retainers from the intake manifold and the transaxle.
11. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3408
12. Remove the 2 bolts and the transaxle selector lever cable splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
13. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock.
1. Pull out on the selector lever cable adjuster lock tabs.
2. Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable.
- To install, push the selector lever cable adjuster lock in place to lock the selector lever cable.
14. Remove the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever, remove the selector lever
cable bracket nuts and remove the selector lever
cable assembly. To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the transmission manual control lever is in the DRIVE
position with the ignition in the OFF position or the
selector lever cable will have to be adjusted.
Place the manual control lever in DRIVE, by positioning the manual control lever between the 2 ribs
on the transaxle case. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3413
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3414
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3415
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3416
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3417
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3418
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3419
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3420
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3421
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3422
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3423
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3424
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3425
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3426
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3427
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3428
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3429
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3430
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3431
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3432
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
37-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3433
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3434
Shift Interlock: Service and Repair
Brake Shift Interlock Override
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving
the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift
interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out
of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
2. NOTE: The relief is located at the front of the access panel.
Remove the override cap.
3. Using a suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector lever,
apply the brake, depress the button on the selector
lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Start the vehicle.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever
Selector Lever
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The Transmission Range (TR) sensor is part of the selector lever assembly.
All vehicles
1. Place the selector lever in the D position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3440
2. Gently pry up to remove the selector lever trim ring.
3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
4. Remove the top finish panel from the center console.
5. Disconnect the power outlet electrical connector.
6. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3441
7. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector and disconnect the wiring harness fastener from
the selector lever.
8. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever.
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever.
1. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.
2. Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
10. Pull the AWD module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3442
11. Remove the 2 screws from the center console.
12. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Adjust the selector lever cable. For additional
information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.
See: Shift Linkage/Adjustments
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3443
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Bezel
Selector Lever Bezel
Removal
1. Place the selector lever in the D position.
2. Gently pry up to remove the selector lever trim ring.
3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3444
4. Remove the top finish panel from the center console.
5. Disconnect the power outlet electrical connector.
6. Remove the selector lever knob trim covers by carefully prying out on the bottom front corners
and then pry out on the top front corner and
remove the covers.
7. Remove the 2 selector lever knob screws and remove the selector lever knob.
8. Remove the selector lever bezel light from the selector lever bezel.
9. NOTE: Selector lever removed for clarity.
Release the tabs and remove the selector lever bezel from the selector lever.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3445
Installation
1. NOTE: Selector lever removed for clarity.
Install the selector lever bezel. Be sure the tabs are correctly fastened on the selector lever.
2. Install the selector lever bezel light in the selector lever bezel.
3. Install the selector lever knob and the 2 screws.
4. Install the selector lever knob trim covers.
5. Connect the power outlet electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3446
6. Install the center console finish panel.
7. Install the center console compartment tray.
8. Install the selector lever trim ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3447
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Knob
Selector Lever Knob
Removal
1. Remove the selector lever knob trim covers by carefully prying out on the bottom front corners
and then pry out on the top front corner and
remove the covers.
2. Remove the 2 selector lever knob screws and remove the selector lever knob.
Installation
1. Install the selector lever knob and the 2 screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 3448
2. Install the selector lever knob trim covers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3453
Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacities
Motor electronics cooling system.........................................................................................................
........................................................3.5L (3.7 quarts)*
* Note: Approximate dry fill capacity
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3454
Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications
Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3455
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS)
The vehicle uses a pump driven cooling system, referred to as the Motor Electronics Cooling
System (MECS) pump, to transfer heat generated by the Electronically Controlled Continuously
Variable Transmission (eCVT) and the Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) DC/DC converter to the
atmosphere. The system uses a coolant-to-air radiator design.
The MECS pump is an electric pump that runs any time the ignition is in the ON position. Unlike
traditional cooling systems, there is no thermostat in the MECS, so coolant flow should be
continuous and considerably less than traditional powertrain cooling systems.
The flow direction is from the degas bottle and DC/DC converter to the MECS pump through the
eCVT, then through the MECS radiator from the LH to RH side of the vehicle back to the degas
bottle.
The MECS cooling pump will make an audible noise if it is running and a slight vibration may be felt
by touch. Flow can be verified by visually inspecting for coolant flow into the degas bottle. Flow can
be viewed easily in the degas bottle by holding a light source behind the degas bottle. Only a
portion of the coolant flow is diverted to the degas bottle via the "T" in the coolant outlet hose.
Additional flow can be routed to the degas bottle by closing off the flow past the "T" and into the
DC/DC converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3456
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Procedures
Motor Electronics Cooling System Draining and Filling
Special Tool(s)
Material
Draining
CAUTION: The coolant must be recovered in a suitable, clean container for reuse. If the coolant is
contaminated, it must be recycled or disposed of correctly.
CAUTION: Always refill the motor electronics cooling system (MECS) with the same type of coolant
that was drained from the system. Do not mix coolant types.
1. With the vehicle in DRIVE, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the LH splash shield. 4. Place a suitable container below the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3459
5. Loosen the hose clamps at the transaxle, then pull the hoses off to allow the coolant to drain. 6.
Connect the hoses to the transaxle and install the hose clamps. 7. Install the LH splash shield.
Filling and Bleeding with RADKITPLUS
1. Using the special tool, install the RADKITPLUS and follow the manufacturer's instructions to fill
and bleed the cooling system.
Filling and Bleeding without RADKITPLUS
CAUTION: Engine coolant provides freeze protection, boil protection, cooling efficiency and
corrosion protection to the engine and cooling components. In order to obtain these protections, the
engine coolant must be maintained at the correct concentration and fluid level in the degas bottle.
When adding engine coolant, use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water.
To maintain the integrity of the coolant and the cooling system: ^
Vehicle cooling systems are filled with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant. Always fill the
cooling system with the same coolant that is present in the system. Do not mix coolant types.
^ Do not add/mix orange-colored Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant VC-2 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44-D or green colored Premium Engine Coolant. Mixing
coolants may degrade the coolant's corrosion protection.
^ Do not add alcohol, methanol or brine, or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze. These can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
^ Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles
originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling
process is not yet available.
^ Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your communities
regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
1. CAUTION: Adhesives, stop-leak pellets or small debris in the Motor electronics cooling system
(MECS) can cause poor performance or
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3460
temporary blockage of the motor electronics pump. Only use clean, approved coolant when filling
the system.
Loosen the bleed screw and fill the degas bottle with coolant until it begins to flow out of the bleed
hole. Then, close the bleed screw.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position to actuate the motor electronics cooling pump and continue
to fill the degas bottle to the correct level.
3. NOTE: Most of the MECS air bleeding occurs as a normal process at the degas bottle through
the vent tube; very little occurs at the bleed screw.
To bleed air from the system, loosen the bleed screw and allow air to escape while the M/E coolant
pump is operating.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3461
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement
Motor Electronics Cooler
Motor Electronics Cooler
Motor Electronics Cooler
1. Drain the motor electronics cooling system (MECS). For additional information, refer to Motor
Electronics Cooling System Draining and Filling.
See: Service and Repair/Procedures
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the MECS radiator inlet hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3462
4. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the MECS radiator outlet hose.
5. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Remove the MECS radiator bolts. ^
To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Motor Electronics Pump
Motor Electronics Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3463
1. Drain the motor electronics cooling system (MECS). For additional information, refer to See:
Service and Repair/Procedures
2. Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses.
^ Disconnect the harness connector.
3. Remove the bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3464
Transmission Cooler: Tools and Equipment
Transaxle Cooling
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Transmission Mount: Diagrams Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper > Page
3472
Transmission Mount: Diagrams Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper > Page
3473
Transmission Mount: Diagrams Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
Removal and Installation
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3476
4. Remove the bolts and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Remove the lower insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
6. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
7. Remove and discard the engine support crossmember nut. Remove the 2 engine support
crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten the new engine support crossmember nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the 2 engine support crossmember bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
8. Remove the engine support crossmember.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3477
9. Remove the rear roll restrictor through bolt and remove the rear roll restrictor from the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3478
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
3. Remove the rear insulator nuts and bolt.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3479
4. Remove the rear insulator studs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Remove the rear insulator.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3480
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Upper
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Insulator and Retainer - Lower >
Page 3481
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly.
2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg Adapter, Engine Support Bar Adapter and Lifting
Hook Adapter.
3. Remove the upper insulator bracket bolts and the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the upper insulator.
1. Remove the upper insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
2. Remove the upper insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten the bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3485
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3486
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3487
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Differential Housing Cover
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover.
- Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing
cover are clean and free of oil before installing the
new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined
surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5mm (0.118-0.196 in) below the
bottom of the filler hole and install the filler plug.
- Tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 2.96 pints (1.4 liters)
NOTE: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3496
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
REAR AXLE Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N ..................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification ...............................................................................................
....................................................................................... WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40
Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Seal
Stub Shaft Seal
Removal
1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only.
Remove the halfshaft assembly.
2. Use the Torque Converter Fluid Seal Remover and Slide Hammer to remove the stub shaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease.
Using the Front Axle Oil Seal Installer and Handle, install the stub shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 3501
2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the
halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal
with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 3502
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal
Drive Pinion Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange.
3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft.
Disconnect the rear driveshaft U-joint flange.
- Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
- Position aside the driveshaft and flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 3503
4. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut.
- Remove and discard the pinion flange nut.
5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange.
6. Using the 2-Jaw Puller, remove the pinion flange.
7. Using the Converter Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the pinion seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal.
Using the Pinion Drive Seal Installer, install the pinion seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 3504
2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with grease.
Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange.
3. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install a new pinion nut.
- Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft).
4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and U-joint flange.
- Install the 4 new bolts.
- Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Front Drive Halfshafts
Material
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3510
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Rear Drive Halfshafts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Drive Halfshafts
The halfshafts and intermediate shaft consists of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- A support bearing on the intermediate shaft
The shafts are serviced as assemblies only.
The front drive halfshafts are splined to drive the front wheel hubs. The LH halfshaft uses a circlip
to retain the inner CV joint stub shaft in the differential side gear. The RH halfshaft is connected to
an intermediate shaft with a circlip. The intermediate shaft is also driven by a differential side gear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3513
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The rear drive halfshafts have the following features:
- The inner and outer CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove
inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together.
- The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
- An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear.
- A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV
joint) to the rear hub.
- The rear halfshafts are serviced as assemblies only.
The rear drive halfshafts are driven by the differential side gears in the rear drive axle. The splined
inner CV joint housing transfers the torque to the connecting shaft through the flexible joint
consisting of caged balls or 3 roller trunion. This allows the connecting shaft to change both length
and angle while the joint housing remains fixed. The CV joints are lubricated with a special high
temperature grease that is contained by flexible rubber boots sealed to the joint housing and
connecting shafts by clamps. The outer CV joint receives the rotational force from the connecting
shaft and in turn, drives the rear wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3514
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Halfshaft Joint
Halfshaft Joint
The front drive halfshaft CV joints consist of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- CV joint boot clamps
- Convoluted CV joint boots
- Tripod joint housings
- Ball and cage housings
- Retainer circlips
- Special CV high temperature grease
The halfshaft joint allows for smooth rotation of the interconnecting shaft and the outboard housing.
It also adjusts for length requirements as the vehicle goes through jounce and rebound.
The halfshaft joints are not repairable and are serviced as assemblies only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Halfshaft
NOTE: RH halfshaft shown, LH similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3517
Removal
All halfshafts
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
5. Remove the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- Discard the nut and bolt.
6. NOTE: Do not allow the ball joint stud to contact the CV joint boot.
Separate the lower arm from the front wheel knuckle.
7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Left halfshaft
8. Using the Halfshaft Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the LH halfshaft from the differential.
Right halfshaft
9. Using a brass drift to strike the RH halfshaft in the indicated area, separate and remove the
halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3518
Installation
Left halfshaft
1. NOTE: When seated correctly, the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into
the differential side gear groove.
Position the LH halfshaft so the splines line up with the differential side gear splines. Push the
halfshaft into the differential side gear.
Right halfshaft
2. Align the RH halfshaft with the splines of the intermediate shaft and push the halfshaft in until the
circlip locks the shafts together.
- Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft.
All halfshafts
3. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the front wheel hub.
4. Position the lower arm into the front wheel knuckle.
5. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (222 lb-ft).
8. Install the front tires and wheels.
9. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.
Intermediate Shaft
Intermediate Shaft
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3519
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: If removing the intermediate shaft in order to repair a separate component, it should only
be removed as an assembly with the RH front
drive halfshaft.
Remove the RH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Halfshaft See: Halfshaft.
2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bearing retainer nuts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
3. Remove the intermediate shaft.
4. NOTICE: On All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles, the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) seal must be
replaced everytime the intermediate shaft is
removed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft.
5. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3520
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Halfshaft
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3521
Removal
NOTICE: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer Constant Velocity (CV) joint.
Damage to the CV joint will occur.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Damage to the halfshaft may
occur.
NOTICE: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Damage to
the halfshaft or Constant Velocity (CV) joints may occur.
NOTICE: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Damage to
the halfshaft boots will occur.
NOTICE: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
1. Remove the coil spring.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
4. Remove and discard the 4 stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts.
5. NOTE: Support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint.
6. NOTICE: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the differential.
NOTE: Support the halfshaft inner joint.
Using the Halfshaft Remover Tool, remove the halfshaft from the differential.
7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the rear wheel hub assembly.
- Remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3522
2. Using the Axle Seal Protector, install the halfshaft into the differential.
3. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are
correctly aligned.
4. Position the lower ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the rear coil spring.
6. Install the 4 new stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts.
- Tighten the lower bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- Tighten the upper bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
7. Install the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3527
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3528
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3529
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3530
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3531
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Center Support: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 3545
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Center Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 3551
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 3560
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 3566
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3567
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation
Driveshaft
NOTICE: All driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the driveshaft
to prevent overspray of any undercoating material or an unbalanced condition may occur.
The driveshaft consists of:
- spot-welded balance weights.
- a front CV joint at the Power Transfer Unit (PTU).
- a center support bearing assembly with a ground strap.
- staked and snap ring type U-joints.
- U-joint cap straps for the center U-joint.
- square flanged rear U-joint.
The driveshaft is a 2-piece shaft which transfers the rotational torque from the PTU to the rear drive
axle. The driveshaft uses CV joints, U-joints and a center support for consistent operation through
varying lengths and angles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures
Driveline Angle Measurement
Driveline Angle Measurement
NOTE: This procedure does not apply to CV joints, flex couplers or double cardan joints that are
used in some driveshafts. This check is for single-cross and roller-style joints found in the
driveshafts.
NOTE: Prior to checking driveline angularity, inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
NOTE: An incorrect driveline angle can cause a vibration or shudder.
NOTE: Driveline angularity is the angular relationship between the engine crankshaft, the
driveshaft and the rear axle pinion. Factors determining driveline angularity include ride height, rear
spring and engine mounts.
All vehicles
1. Carry out the following preliminary setup steps:
- Inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
- Park the vehicle on a level surface such as a drive-on hoist, or back onto a front end alignment
rack.
- Verify the curb position ride height is within specifications with the vehicle unloaded and all of the
tires are inflated to their normal operating pressures.
- Calibrate the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor by placing it on a clean, flat level
section of the frame rail and press the ALT-ZERO button.
Vehicles with flat-flanged, split-pin or slip-flanged U-joints
2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the snap ring to allow access to the base of the U-joint cup. Make
sure the Anglemaster II Driveline
Inclinometer/Protractor is seated against the U-joint cup.
NOTE: Rotate the driveshaft until the flange U-joint cup is parallel with the floor. This will simplify
taking measurements.
To check the U-joint operating angle, install the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor.
Check and record the flange angle as angle A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3570
3. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the connecting
component. Record the measurement of the
component angle as angle B.
Multiple piece driveshafts
4. NOTE: Repeat this step for each center support bearing on the driveshaft.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the U-joint snap ring, if equipped, for these measurements.
Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the components in
front and behind the center support bearing U-joint in the area indicated. Record the front
component as angle A and the rear component as angle B.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: When 2 connected components slope in the same direction, subtract the smallest
number from the larger number to find the U-joint
operating angle. When 2 connected components slope in the opposite direction, add the
measurements to find the U-joint operating angle.
Calculate the difference in the slope of the components to determine the U-joint operating angle.
- The U-joint operating angle is the angle formed by 2 yokes connected by a cross and bearing kit.
Ideally, the operating angles on each connection of the driveshaft must: be equal or within one degree of each other.
- have a 3 degree maximum operating angle.
- have at least one-half of one degree continuous operating angle.
6. If the angle is not within specifications, repair or adjust to obtain the correct angle. Inspect the
engine mounts, transmission mounts, center support
bearing mounting, rear suspension, rear axle, rear axle mounting or the frame for wear or damage.
Driveshaft Runout And Balancing
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3571
Driveshaft Inspection
NOTE: Driveline vibration exhibits a higher frequency and lower amplitude than high-speed shake.
Driveline vibration is directly related to the speed of the vehicle and is noticed at various speeds.
Driveline vibration can be perceived as a tremor in the floorpan or heard as a rumble, hum or
boom.
NOTE: Refer to Specifications for all runout specifications.
1. NOTE: Do not make any adjustments before carrying out a road test. Do not change the tire
pressure or the vehicle load.
Carry out a visual inspection of the vehicle. Operate the vehicle and verify the condition by
reproducing it during the road test.
- The concern should be directly related to vehicle road speed, not affected by acceleration or
deceleration or could not be reduced by coasting in NEUTRAL.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
- The driveshaft should be kept at an angle equal to or close to the curb-weighted position. Use a
twin-post hoist or a frame hoist with jackstands.
3. Inspect the driveshaft for damage, undercoating or incorrectly seated U-joints. Rotate the
driveshaft slowly by hand and feel for binding or end
play in the U-joint trunnions. Remove the driveshaft. Inspect the slip yoke splines for any galling,
dirt, rust or incorrect lubrication. Clean the driveshaft or install new U-joints as necessary. Install a
new driveshaft if damaged. After any corrections or new components are installed, recheck for the
vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is gone, test drive the vehicle.
- If the vibration persists or the driveshaft passes visual inspection, measure the driveshaft runout.
Driveshaft Runout
1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Rotate the driveshaft by turning the axle
and measure the runout at the front, the center and
the rear of the driveshaft. If the runout exceeds 1 mm (0.040 in) at the front or center, install a new driveshaft.
- If the front and center is within 1 mm (0.040 in), but the rear runout is not, index-mark the rear
runout high point and proceed to Step 2.
- If the runout is within 1 mm (0.040 in) at all points, recheck for vibration at road test speed. If the
vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in
this procedure.
2. NOTE: Circular pinion flanges can be turned in 90 degree or one-fourth increments. Half-round
pinion flanges are limited to 2 positions.
Index-mark the driveshaft to the pinion flange. Disconnect the driveshaft and rotate it 180 degrees.
Reconnect the driveshaft. Recheck the runout at the rear of the driveshaft.
- If the runout is still over specification, mark the high point and proceed to Step 3.
- If the runout is within specification, check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is
still present, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this
procedure.
3. Excessive driveshaft runout can originate in the driveshaft itself or from the pinion flange. To find
the source, compare the 2 high points
previously determined.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3572
- If the index marks are close together, within 25 mm (1 in), the driveshaft is eccentric. Install a new
driveshaft.
- If the marks are on opposite sides of the driveshaft, 180 degrees apart, the slip yoke or pinion
flange is responsible. Check the pinion flange runout. If the pinion flange runout exceeds
specifications, a bent pinion is indicated.
- If the pinion flange and pinion runouts are within specifications, road test and check for the
vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional
information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure.
Driveshaft Balancing - Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH
Analyzer (Vetronix)
All vehicles
1. Install the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) to
the vehicle.
2. Working under the vehicle, install an accelerometer. The accelerometer can be attached and
mounted near either the transmission or differential
end of the driveshaft.
3. Clean an area of the driveshaft and install the reflective tape, then install the photo-tachometer
sensor. The sensor should be placed at
approximately a 20-degree angle from perpendicular to the surface of the reflective tape. Make
sure the sensor does not get moved during the balance procedure.
1. Reflective tape.
2. Photo-tachometer sensor.
4. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a driveshaft balance test with the driveshaft
unmodified.
Vehicles with tapped pinion flanges
5. Label the tapped holes in the pinion flange numerically, starting at the top hole as 1. Mark the
remaining holes 2, 3 and 4. Label in the direction of
rotation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3573
6. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a second test with the 12 mm (0.47 in) test
weight set screw in the No. 1 hole, previously marked on the pinion flange.
7. Remove the test weight, then install the weight combination directed by the Mastertech(R)
Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH
Analyzer (Vetronix).
Vehicles without tapped pinion flanges
8. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a second test with a test weight. Using a metal
band, secure the test weight to the end of the driveshaft. The weight should be placed at the end of
the driveshaft tube, as close to the tube-to-yoke weld seam as possible. Mark the location of the
test weight on the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Tube-to-yoke weld seam.
3. Driveshaft pinion flange.
- Select the test weight based on driveshaft size. Larger driveshafts use 10 g (0.353 oz). Smaller
driveshafts use 5 g (0.176 oz).
9. Remove the test weight, then install the recommended weight at the position directed by the
Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance
and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Using a metal band and epoxy, secure the test weight to the
driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Measure in this direction.
3. Driveshaft diameter.
4. Directional rotation.
5. Balance weight relative to test weight centerline.
- The results are displayed with respect to the location to where the test weight was placed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3574
All vehicles
10. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a third test to verify the repair.
Driveshaft Balancing - Hose Clamp Method
1. Install 1 or 2 hose clamps on the driveshaft, near the rear. Position of the hose clamp head(s)
can be determined through trial and error.
2. Mark the rear of the driveshaft into 4 approximately equal sectors and number the marks 1
through 4. Install a hose clamp on the driveshaft with its
head at position No. 1, as shown in the figure below. Check for vibration at road speed. Recheck
with the clamp at each of the other positions to find the position that shows minimum vibration. If 2
adjacent positions show equal improvement, position the clamp head between them.
3. If the vibration persists, add a second clamp at the same position and recheck for vibration.
4. If no improvement is noted, rotate the clamps in opposite directions, equal distances from the
best position determined in Step 2. Separate the
clamp heads about 13 mm (1/2 in) and recheck for vibration at the road speed.
5. Repeat the process with increasing separation until the best combination is found or the vibration
is reduced to an acceptable level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3575
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement
Driveshaft
Driveshaft
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The Escape Hybrid driveshaft is longer than the driveshaft in the Escape/Mariner and is not
interchangeable.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the ground strap bolt.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. NOTICE: Do not reuse the constant velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and
washers or damage to the vehicle may
occur.
Remove and discard the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
5. NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap
straps or damage to the vehicle may
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3576
occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement cap strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove and discard the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the driveshaft.
7. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts.
Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts.
- To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
8. With the help of an assistant, remove the center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
9. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index
the driveshaft.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation
Universal Joint: Description and Operation
Universal Joints
The center and rear joints consist of:
- a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication.
- equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end
play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement.
- staked in place U-joints are not serviced individually. If worn or damaged, install a new driveshaft
assembly.
- snap ring type U-joints can be replaced if worn or damaged.
The U-joints allow the speeding up and slowing down of the driveshaft as the angularity of the
driveshaft changes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3580
Universal Joint: Service and Repair
Driveshaft Universal Joint - Snap Ring Type
Disassembly
1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller
Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
2. NOTICE: Do not, under any circumstance, clamp the driveshaft assembly in the jaws of a vise or
similar holding fixture. Denting or
localized fracturing may result, causing driveshaft failure during vehicle operation.
Place the driveshaft on a suitable workbench. Do not damage the tube.
3. NOTE: If the components are not marked and therefore installed incorrectly, driveshaft
imbalance can occur.
Index-mark the driveshaft components.
4. Remove and discard all 4 of the snap rings.
5. Place the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover in a vise.
6. NOTE: If necessary, use a pair of pliers to remove a bearing cup that fails to press out all the
way.
Remove the bearing cups and the driveshaft slip yoke.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3581
1. Position the driveshaft slip yoke in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover.
2. Press out a bearing cup.
3. Rotate the driveshaft slip yoke 180 degrees.
4. Press on the U-joint spider to remove the remaining bearing cup.
5. Remove the driveshaft slip yoke.
7. Repeat steps to remove the remaining bearing cups and the U-joint spider from the driveshaft
yoke.
8. NOTE: Inspect the bearing cup bores and retaining ring grooves. Remove any rust or other
surface irregularities.
Inspect the bearing cup bores of the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke. Make sure that the
bearing cup bores are clean and smooth.
Assembly
1. NOTE: Install the U-Joint Kits as complete assemblies only. Do not mix components from other
U-Joint Kits.
NOTE: Lubricate the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke bearing cup bores with grease before
installing the bearing cups.
Install a new U-joint spider and bearing cup.
1. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft yoke.
- Check the needle bearings for correct positioning.
2. Position the new U-joint spider in the driveshaft yoke.
3. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, press the bearing cup to just below the snap
ring groove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3582
2. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component
can occur.
Remove the shaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow snap
ring.
3. Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft
yoke.
- If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings.
4. Install the driveshaft slip yoke and new bearing cup.
1. Align the index marks made during disassembly and install the driveshaft slip yoke on the U-joint
spider.
2. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft slip yoke.
- Check the needle bearings for correct positioning.
3. Position the assembly in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover.
4. Press the bearing cup to just below the snap ring groove.
5. Remove the driveshaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow
snap ring.
6. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component
can occur.
Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft slip
yoke.
- If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings.
7. NOTICE: Do not strike the bearings or damage to the component can occur.
A sharp rap on the driveshaft yoke with a brass or plastic hammer will seat the bearing cups.
8. Rotate the driveshaft yoke to make sure the U-joints are free to rotate easily, without binding,
before installing the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3583
9. Install the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller
Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
Install the flywheel and the bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in the following 3 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to...............................................................................................................................
..........................................................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to..........................................
...............................................................................................................................................80 Nm
(59 lb-ft). Stage 3: Tighten to................................................................................................................
.......................................................................112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3587
Flywheel: Diagrams
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3588
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel Runout Check
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid. Use a dry cloth only or
damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3591
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage
to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle.
4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave
cylinder.
5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper.
6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If
spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle.
7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate.
- Discard the clutch disc.
8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary.
- Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or
discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth.
- Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or
discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery
cloth.
9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for
scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel.
10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and
counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction
control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3592
11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new
dual mass flywheel if necessary.
12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction
control plate is off center or damaged.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational
freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17.
13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary
mass notches.
14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel.
15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay.
Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual
mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the
freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary
mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the
dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay
exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3593
18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal
spring operation using the following Steps 19 through
21.
19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The
secondary mass should begin to engage the internal
spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should
continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary
mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise.
The secondary mass should begin to engage the
internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass
should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the
secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using
the following Steps 23 and 24.
23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable.
Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface.
- Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts and remove the Flywheel Holding Tool.
24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel
should not be discarded based on this movement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3594
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bush for
wear and install new as necessary.
- Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass.
- Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the
secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge.
- Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any
deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass
flywheel.
25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block.
1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new
dowel pins as necessary.
2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new
plates as necessary.
3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as
necessary.
26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face.
- Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged.
27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking
compound or rust and clean as necessary.
28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
Loosely install the dual mass flywheel.
29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3595
31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Install the clutch disc and pressure plate.
32. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 3596
Flywheel: Service and Repair
Flywheel
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the engine. For additional information, refer to Engine See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine - Removal.
3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flywheel.
Installation
1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in the following 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
2. Install the engine. For additional information, refer to Engine See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine - Removal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3604
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3605
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3606
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3607
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3608
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3609
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3610
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3611
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3612
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3613
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3614
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3615
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3616
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3617
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3618
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3619
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3620
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3621
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3622
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3623
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3624
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3625
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3626
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 3627
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3628
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3633
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3634
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3643
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 3645
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3651
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At
60-70 MPH
Case: Customer Interest 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
TSB 09-12-16
06/29/09
4WD, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - WHINE NOISE 60-70 MPH (96-112 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and four
wheel drive (4WD) system may exhibit a whine noise from the power transfer unit (PTU) at highway
speeds 60-70 MPH (96-112 Km/h).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Add a mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 307-01A: Automatic Transaxle/Transmission.
1. Remove the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator through-bolt. (Figure 1)
2. Add the mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. (Figure 2)
3. Install the through bolt and tighten to 85 +/- 13 lb-ft (115 +/- 17 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At
60-70 MPH > Page 3660
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.2 Hr.
4WD 2.5L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
4WD 3.0L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6068 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent >
Page 3665
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining
Noise At 60-70 MPH
Case: All Technical Service Bulletins 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
TSB 09-12-16
06/29/09
4WD, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - WHINE NOISE 60-70 MPH (96-112 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and four
wheel drive (4WD) system may exhibit a whine noise from the power transfer unit (PTU) at highway
speeds 60-70 MPH (96-112 Km/h).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Add a mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 307-01A: Automatic Transaxle/Transmission.
1. Remove the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator through-bolt. (Figure 1)
2. Add the mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. (Figure 2)
3. Install the through bolt and tighten to 85 +/- 13 lb-ft (115 +/- 17 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining
Noise At 60-70 MPH > Page 3671
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.2 Hr.
4WD 2.5L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
4WD 3.0L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6068 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From
PTU Vent
Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From
PTU Vent > Page 3676
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3680
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3681
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Vibration Damper,
Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: >
09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
Vibration Damper: Customer Interest 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
TSB 09-12-16
06/29/09
4WD, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - WHINE NOISE 60-70 MPH (96-112 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and four
wheel drive (4WD) system may exhibit a whine noise from the power transfer unit (PTU) at highway
speeds 60-70 MPH (96-112 Km/h).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Add a mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 307-01A: Automatic Transaxle/Transmission.
1. Remove the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator through-bolt. (Figure 1)
2. Add the mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. (Figure 2)
3. Install the through bolt and tighten to 85 +/- 13 lb-ft (115 +/- 17 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Vibration Damper,
Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: >
09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH > Page 3691
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.2 Hr.
4WD 2.5L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
4WD 3.0L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6068 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Vibration Damper,
Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration
Damper: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
Vibration Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
TSB 09-12-16
06/29/09
4WD, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - WHINE NOISE 60-70 MPH (96-112 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and four
wheel drive (4WD) system may exhibit a whine noise from the power transfer unit (PTU) at highway
speeds 60-70 MPH (96-112 Km/h).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Add a mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 307-01A: Automatic Transaxle/Transmission.
1. Remove the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator through-bolt. (Figure 1)
2. Add the mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. (Figure 2)
3. Install the through bolt and tighten to 85 +/- 13 lb-ft (115 +/- 17 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Vibration Damper,
Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration
Damper: > 09-12-16 > Jun > 09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH > Page 3697
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.2 Hr.
4WD 2.5L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
4WD 3.0L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6068 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak
From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak
From PTU Vent > Page 3706
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3712
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................
............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3715
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type ................................................................................................................................................
SAE 75W-140 High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair
Output Flange
Removal
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles.
1. Remove the driveshaft.
2. NOTICE: Rotational torque of the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange must be
measured and recorded using a Nm
(lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled.
Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture to hold the flange, remove the pinion nut.
3. NOTE: Index-mark the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange relative to the pinion
spline.
Using a suitable tool such as Snap-on(R) CJ2001, remove the PTU rear output shaft flange.
Installation
1. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange to engage the spline as previously marked. Install the
PTU rear output shaft flange.
2. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded
with a Nm (in-lb) torque wrench.
Overtightening the pinion nut will damage the collapsible spacer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3719
NOTICE: If the rotational torque is less than specification, tighten the drive pinion nut in small
increments until it is within specification. Do not tighten the drive pinion nut more than 3 Nm (27
lb-in) or the collapsible spacer will be damaged. If the rotation torque is higher than specification,
the collapsible spacer has been compressed too far and a new collapsible spacer must be
installed.
Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install the pinion nut.
3. Install the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3724
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3725
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal
Input Shaft Seal
Input Shaft Seal
1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
2. Remove the bolt and the vent tube.
3. Remove the 12 bolts and the PTU cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3730
4. Remove the helical driven gear, idler gear and drive gear.
5. Using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust Shield Installer and Handle, remove the input shaft seal.
6. Clean the PTU sealing surface.
Intermediate Shaft Seal
Intermediate Shaft Seal
1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
2. Using the Halfshaft Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the intermediate shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3731
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation
Input Shaft Seal
Input Shaft Seal
1. Using the Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the input shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3732
2. NOTE: Make sure not to roll the inner input seal sealing lip when installing the drive gear.
Install the helical gears.
1. Install the drive gear. Use a slight rotation to prevent damaging the inner input seal.
2. Install the idler gear.
3. Install the driven gear.
3. NOTE: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of oil
before applying new sealant.
Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant to the sealing surface of the PTU cover. Install the
PTU cover and tighten the 12 PTU cover bolts in a star pattern. Tighten to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft).
4. Install the vent tube and the bolt.
- Tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. Install the PTU. For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer
Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
Intermediate Shaft Seal
Intermediate Shaft Seal
1. Using the Handle and PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the intermediate shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3733
2. Install the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3737
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3744
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3752
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3753
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3754
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3755
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3756
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3757
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3758
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3759
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3760
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3761
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3762
Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3763
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3764
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3765
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3766
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3767
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3768
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3769
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3770
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3771
Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3772
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3773
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3774
Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
29-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3775
29-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 3776
Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) Reprogramming
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS,
AND WIRING. THE HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABELS CONTAINING THE HIGH VOLTAGE
SYMBOL ARE LOCATED ON EACH HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENT. HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
AND WIRING ARE ORANGE IN COLOR. CERTIFIED RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES AND A
FACE SHIELD MUST BE WORN WHEN WORKING WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES,
COMPONENTS, OR WIRING. THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE CYCLED TO THE OFF POSITION
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES, AND THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRACTION BATTERY SERVICE
DISCONNECT PLUG PLACED IN THE SERVICING/SHIPPING POSITION BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES. DO NOT DISCONNECT, DISABLE, OR
TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, COMPONENTS, OR WIRING DURING THE MODULE
REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE BECAUSE HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
Description
Note: After the TCM is successfully reprogrammed clear the continuous diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the powertrain control module (PCM) and the TCM that may have been stored during
reprogramming.
Changes made to the strategy or calibration may require TCM reprogramming. Refer to the Module
Programming instructions on the scan tool.
Making Changes To The TCM Calibration
If the TCM does not complete the reflash after two consecutive attempts, follow the instructions
listed below:
1. If the TCM reprogramming aborts during the procedure:
- Reprogram the TCM again.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, clear the continuous DTCs in the PCM
and the TCM.
2. If the TCM reprogramming aborts immediately after the start:
- Turn the key OFF.
- Disconnect the PCM body/cowl connector, and leave it disconnected.
- Turn the key ON.
- Start the TCM reprogramming.
- After the TCM reprogramming is successfully completed, turn the key OFF and connect the PCM
body/cowl connector.
- Clear any PCM and TCM DTCs that may have been stored during reprogramming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3781
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3782
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information >
Diagrams
Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams
Electrical Connectors
C2096 (Vehicle Harness Side)
C2096 (Component Side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3791
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3792
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3793
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Overview
The TR sensor communicates the gear selector position the driver selects to the PCM. The PCM
determines a gear mode based on the TR input and the vehicle speed signal. The PCM then
broadcasts a gear mode message over the communication link. The TCM uses the gear mode
message to engage the transaxle in the gear the driver selected. The other control modules use
the gear mode message to control the rear lamps or a brake shift interlock solenoid. The TR sensor
is mounted at the base of the gear selector assembly and the sensor shaft is moved by the
selector.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
TR Sensor and PCM Interface
The TR sensor is a linear potentiometer device that provides the PCM with a percentage of input
voltage proportional to the rotational angle of the sensor shaft. The TR sensor consists of:
- two independent (TR-A1 and TR-A2) signals
- two 5 volt reference (TR-VREF1 and TR-VREF2) lines
- two signal return (TR-RTN1 and TR-RTN2) lines
The TR-A1 signal has a negative voltage slope, meaning the voltage decreases when the sensor
angle increases. The typical TR voltage ranges from approximately 4.3 volts in the PARK position
to approximately 0.6 volt in the LOW gear position. The TR-A2 signal has a positive voltage slope.
Voltages increase as the sensor angle increases. The typical voltage for the TR-A2 is about 1 volt
in the PARK position to about 4.4 volts in the LOW gear position.
The TR-VREF circuits are bussed together internal to the TR sensor, and both TR-RTN circuits are
bussed together in the TR sensor. One of the TR-VREF and one of the TR-RTN circuits are
dedicated signals from the PCM. This design of redundant signals protects against an open circuit
condition.
Voltage Versus Angle and Gear Selected Chart
If the PCM detects a concern in one of TR signal inputs, it uses the other TR signal to determine
what gear the driver selects. If the PCM detects one or more TR signals that are invalid, the PCM:
- allows the vehicle to travel in DRIVE position or LOW gear position if the vehicle was driving
forward at a significant speed when the concern was detected.
- allows the vehicle to travel in REVERSE gear if the vehicle was driving backwards at a significant
speed when the concern was detected.
- broadcasts gear mode - NEUTRAL over the communication link when vehicle speed decreases to
8 km/h (5 mph).
- sets the DTC and illuminates the indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3809
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3810
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3811
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3812
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information,
refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service
and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) heat shield.
- Remove the 2 heat shield bolts. To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3816
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Note the order of the brake tubes.
Disconnect the brake tube-to-HCU fittings (12 mm).
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the brake tube from the routing clip located at the bottom of the HCU bracket.
7. Remove the HCU assembly.
8. NOTE: Use care not to cross the tubes during installation. If the brake tubes are crossed, the
ABS module will set DTCs during an ABS event.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3821
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Vacuum Brake
Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Vacuum Brake
Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3825
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 09-5-5 >
Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 3834
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: >
09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 3840
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3843
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3844
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3845
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3848
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3849
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 3850
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3853
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3854
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3855
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3856
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3857
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 3858
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3863
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3864
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3865
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3866
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3867
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3868
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 3869
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake master cylinder
- Brake pedal and bracket assembly
- Brake tubes and hoses
The hydraulic brake system is diagonally split with the LH front and RH rear brakes on one circuit
and the RH front and LH rear brakes on the other circuit.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master
cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed from the master cylinder through
the double-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses to the front brake calipers and rear wheel
cylinders. The brake fluid enters the brake calipers and wheel cylinders, forcing brake pads and
shoes outward against the brake disc/drum friction surfaces, slowing or stopping rotation. When the
brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear brake
components to the unapplied position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3873
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column shaft.
2. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch and speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch
plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the
switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3874
Remove the stoplamp switch.
3. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster
push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the harness retainers.
5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper and lower nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
8. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly.
- Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the
brake booster studs.
9. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch or the speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and
with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any
other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Carry the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 3880
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Caliper: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3883
Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement
Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3884
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3885
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper.
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3886
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and
pressurizing the brake system.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A).
3. Remove the wheel and tire.
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake pad minimum thickness..............................................................................................................
........................................................3.0 mm (0.118 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3890
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined.
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads.
- If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads
and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 3893
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder
reservoir until it is half filled.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. NOTICE: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can
occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 3894
5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
7. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary.
10. NOTICE: Protect the piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the caliper piston
bores or damage to the piston or boots may
occur.
If installing new brake pads, using a C-clamp and worn brake pad, compress the brake caliper
piston into the brake caliper.
11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary.
Installation
1. Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply
a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake
pad contact points on the anchor plate.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 3895
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
8. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
9. Install the wheel and tire.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Disc minimum thickness.............................................................................................................
........................................................24 mm (0.944 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 3899
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Discs
NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts.
This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around
the circumference of the brake disc. Record the
measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc.
- If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc.
- If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that
varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that
caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine,
discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to
Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Service and Repair/Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures
Brake Disc Machining
NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only.
Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing,
operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred.
However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial
indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout
should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is
carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification,
and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining.
NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may
occur.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper.
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside,
as required.
- Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. Install the hub adapter using:
- four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub.
- six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub.
- four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub.
4. Install the cutting lathe.
5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total
indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The
maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in).
6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer.
7. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter
cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster.
Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
8. Remove the lathe and the silencer.
9. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter.
10. Remove the metal shavings.
11. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications. For
additional information, refer to Specifications.
Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly.
- Install the bolts.
- For fastener torque specifications, refer to Disc Brake System. See: Specifications
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3902
Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Disc
Brake Disc
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Anchor
Plate See: Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Caliper Anchor Plate.
2. Remove the brake disc.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Wheel Cylinder See: Wheel
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable
assembly through the backing plate.
4. Remove the rear wheel hub.
5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate.
- To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Brake drum maximum diameter...........................................................................................................
..................................................256.3 mm (10.090 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3910
Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Drums
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements,
refer to Specifications.
- If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum.
- If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum.
- Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate,
should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter
specification.
- For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3911
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Removal
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes.
1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster.
2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes.
3. Remove the brake drum.
Installation
1. Using the Brake Drum Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
- Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside
face of the brake drum.
2. Adjust the rear brakes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake
Shoe/Adjustments.
3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
4. Install the wheel and tire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake shoe minimum thickness............................................................................................................
........................................................1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3915
Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Shoes
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake
shoes.
- Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new
hardware as necessary.
- Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or
install new as necessary.
- Verify correct brake shoe adjustment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3916
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Brake Adjustment Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the Brake Adjustment Gauge on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly.
4. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3917
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce the
possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
uneven braking and serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to provide an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions.
Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins.
3. Remove the upper return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the lower return spring.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
7. Remove the leading brake shoe.
- Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
- Apply a thin coat of the specified silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Adjustments.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection
Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3923
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3924
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Brake
Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3925
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3926
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3927
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3933
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3934
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3935
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3936
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from around the brake fluid reservoir cap and remove the cap. Fill the brake
master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake
fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3937
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleed the brake system at 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi).
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3938
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container
partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 3939
plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Calipers > Page 3944
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Caliper: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3947
Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement
Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3948
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3949
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper.
12. Install the wheel and tire.
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3950
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and
pressurizing the brake system.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 9 (50A) and 18 (50A).
3. Remove the wheel and tire.
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
5. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... PM-1-C Ford Specification .............................................
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3957
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3961
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result
in brake tube failure.
NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube
fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong, leakproof connections. When bending
tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube.
1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage.
- If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of
the same type, size, shape and length.
- When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to
specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake
System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any
other signs of damage.
- Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 3967
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 3968
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip.
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket.
5. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new retaining clip.
- Bleed the brake caliper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) heat shield.
- Remove the 2 heat shield bolts. To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3972
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Note the order of the brake tubes.
Disconnect the brake tube-to-HCU fittings (12 mm).
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the brake tube from the routing clip located at the bottom of the HCU bracket.
7. Remove the HCU assembly.
8. NOTE: Use care not to cross the tubes during installation. If the brake tubes are crossed, the
ABS module will set DTCs during an ABS event.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder.
3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage.
Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy
force. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak
and a new brake master cylinder must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 3977
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair.
2. Apply and release the brakes.
3. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 4.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake
caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as
necessary.
4. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is
not partially applied.
5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the
brake booster.
6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster.
- If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 3978
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined.
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads.
- If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads
and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection/Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake Shoes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Shoes
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake
shoes.
- Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new
hardware as necessary.
- Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or
install new as necessary.
- Verify correct brake shoe adjustment.
Brake Discs
Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 3979
Brake Discs
NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts.
This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness in a minimum of 4 places around
the circumference of the brake disc. Record the
measurements, refer to Specifications. If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc.
- If any measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc.
- If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that
varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that
caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine,
discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to
Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
Brake Drums
Brake System Inspection
Brake Drums
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements,
refer to Specifications.
- If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum.
- If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum.
- Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate,
should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter
specification.
- For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe / Adjustments. See: Drum Brake System/Brake
Shoe/Adjustments
Wheel Cylinders
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 3980
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper.
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads. For additional information, refer to Brake System Inspection. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result
in brake tube failure.
NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube
fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 3981
leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful
not to kink or crack the tube.
1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage.
- If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of
the same type, size, shape and length.
- When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to
specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake
System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any
other signs of damage.
- Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake System Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder
NOTE: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such
as after brake application and release) will remain unchanged. Fluid level will decrease with pad
wear.
NOTE: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting
flange. This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal.
1. Inspect the brake master cylinder for fluid leaks.
- Install a new master cylinder or brake fluid reservoir if signs of excessive leaking are present.
- To check for correct brake master cylinder operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Brake Booster
Brake System Inspection
Brake Booster (Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for
leaks and kinks.
- Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found.
- Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary.
2. Check all electrical connections by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harnesses.
- Repair the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed.
3. Retrieve any ABS module DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3984
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System
Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3985
Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
3. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder
ports.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3986
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the master cylinder.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from
the brake fluid reservoir.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
4. Remove the reservoir.
- Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
- Pull the reservoir upwards.
5. Remove and discard the 2 seals.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3987
- Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Bleed the brake system.
- If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3993
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3994
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3995
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3996
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3997
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Parking Brake Cable: Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
1. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the
front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake
control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 in) x 100 mm (3.93 in) retainer pin can be
inserted.
2. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are
secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly.
To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4003
Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4004
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Compress the retaining clip and detach the parking brake cable from the exhaust support
bracket.
5. Remove the parking brake cable bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4005
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the parking brake control. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Control
See: Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the floor console.
4. Remove the driver side front seat.
5. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by
releasing the locking tab.
7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4006
8. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel.
2. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Parking Brake
Cable/Service and Repair/Procedures.
3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the
harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control
cover.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
7. Remove the parking brake control.
- Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of
fasteners.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4010
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 > Brakes - Park
Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
Parking Brake Pedal: Customer Interest Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
TSB 09-6-7
04/06/09
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS
ON
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on
10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due
to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash.
2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand.
3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 206-00.
4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section
206-05.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With
2780A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2780 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Pedal: > 09-6-7 > Apr > 09 >
Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully Release
Parking Brake Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Won't Fully
Release
TSB 09-6-7
04/06/09
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL WILL NOT FULLY RETURN WHEN RELEASED - INDICATOR STAYS
ON
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, built on
10/1/2008 through and including 1/26/2009, may exhibit a parking brake indicator on the dash, due
to the parking brake pedal not returning to the fully released position.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify parking brake indicator is illuminated in the dash.
2. Pull the pedal up to the fully released position by hand.
3. If the indicator does not go out, this procedure does not apply. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 206-00.
4. If the indicator does go out, replace the parking brake control assembly following WSM, Section
206-05.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090607A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Parking Brake Control Assembly (Do Not Use With
2780A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2780 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4028
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4033
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4034
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster vacuum sensor retainer ring and remove the vacuum sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Locations > Simulator Cut-Off Valve Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Locations > Simulator Cut-Off Valve Solenoid > Page 4040
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Simulator Cut-Off Valve Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Simulator Cut-Off Valve Solenoid > Page 4043
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4044
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The power brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake booster
- Brake booster check valve
- Brake booster travel sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum supply hose
- Vacuum pump (hybrid vehicles)
Conventional brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside
the vacuum booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster
rod opens a valve, allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off
the opposite side. This increases pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the
rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the
valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum valve. This restores vacuum to
both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original position.
Active brake booster (hybrid vehicles)
The active brake booster uses vacuum supplied by an engine mounted electronic vacuum pump
and is similar to a conventional vacuum assist brake booster with the addition of a brake booster
(vacuum) solenoid, a brake booster travel sensor and a vacuum sensor. If it is necessary to apply
the vehicles friction brakes, the ABS module will send a signal to the brake booster solenoid that is
proportional to the amount of brake torque requested. The booster solenoid will open to allow
vacuum to draw the booster diaphragm and pushrod towards the master cylinder piston, building
hydraulic pressure. The brake booster vacuum sensor is used by the ABS module to monitor
vacuum maintained inside the brake booster. The brake booster travel sensor is used to monitor
the performance of the brake booster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4045
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Brake Booster (Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for
leaks and kinks.
- Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found.
- Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary.
2. Check all electrical connections by wiggling connectors and flexing the wire harnesses.
- Repair the connector, terminals or wire harness as needed.
3. Retrieve any ABS module DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4046
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Brake Booster
NOTE: Hybrid vehicle shown, gas vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be removed with
the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed for the switch to
rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal
apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4047
2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster
push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin.
3. Remove and discard the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster.
Hybrid vehicles
5. Disconnect the vacuum pressure sensor, booster solenoid and the booster travel sensor
electrical connectors.
All vehicles
6. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings.
Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward and remove the brake booster.
8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be installed with
the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position.
Installing this switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment
and may damage the switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Hybrid vehicles
9. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4051
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4055
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4056
Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair
Brake Vacuum Pump
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) coolant pump bolts and position the
pump and ground strap aside.
- To install, tighten bolts to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump electrical connector and detach the harness retainer from the
vacuum pump bracket.
3. Remove the vacuum pump bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 2 vacuum pump bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Position the vacuum pump to detach the vacuum hose and remove the vacuum pump.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4064
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4065
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4066
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicles shown, hybrid vehicles similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. For additional information, consult the product Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
All vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4067
2. Remove the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service
and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. Configure the ABS module.
8. Calibrate the ABS module.
- For non-hybrid vehicles, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool
directions.
- For hybrid vehicles, carry out the Multi-Calibration routine following the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum
Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS
Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4078
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4079
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster vacuum sensor retainer ring and remove the vacuum sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4083
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4087
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4091
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4095
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4096
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4100
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4101
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum
Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum
Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4105
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4114
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar >
09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-5-5 > Mar >
09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4120
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed
Sensor: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Accessory Control Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4135
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4138
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 4140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4143
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4144
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4145
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4146
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4147
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4148
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4158
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4159
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
Battery Cables - 2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4164
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery Disconnect See: Service and
Repair/Battery Disconnect.
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
3. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Position the generator B+ terminal cable aside.
5. Disconnect the generator harness retainer.
6. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover.
7. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
8. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Position the starter motor terminals aside.
10. Remove the battery ground cable bolt.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Position the battery ground cable aside.
12. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the left rear of the engine.
13. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the middle of the intake runners.
14. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the front of the engine.
15. Disconnect the clip retainer from the right front of the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4165
16. Disconnect the clip retainer from the left front of the engine.
17. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
18. Open the Battery Junction Box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
19. Position the BJB terminal aside.
20. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector.
21. Disconnect the retainers fastening the battery cables to the battery tray.
22. Remove the battery cables.
23. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4171
Alternator: Mechanical Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4172
Alternator: Description and Operation
Charging System
The charging system is a negative ground system consisting of:
- a generator.
- an internal voltage regulator.
- a charging system warning indicator.
- a battery.
- circuitry and cables.
- a PCM.
The generator is driven by the accessory drive belt. When the engine is started, the generator
begins to generate AC which is internally converted to DC. The DC is controlled by the voltage
regulator (located on the rear of the generator) and supplied to the battery. The PCM controls the
voltage regulation set point, working with the generator internal voltage regulator over 2 control and
communication circuits.
The generator and voltage regulator:
- supply current to the electrical system.
- charge the battery.
- adjust the generator field current to increase or decrease the generator output.
- have a PCM-controlled warning lamp.
- output is controlled by the PCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4173
Alternator: Service and Repair
Generator - 2.5L
Removal
NOTICE: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and internal
diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in component damage.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery.
3. Remove the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield.
4. Rotate the front end accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive
belt aside.
5. Remove the battery harness locator from the lower generator stud.
6. Remove the generator bolt.
7. Remove the 2 generator stud nuts.
8. Working from the top of the vehicle, press the locking tab to release the generator lower air duct
from the generator and remove the lower air duct.
9. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
10. Position the generator B+ cable aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4174
11. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
12. Remove the generator.
13. Remove the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct.
Installation
1. Install the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, install the generator and the generator stud.
3. Install the 2 generator stud nuts hand-tight.
4. Install the generator B+ cable and install the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Connect the generator electrical connector.
6. Position the generator B+ protective cover on the B+ terminal.
7. Working from under the vehicle, install the lower generator bolt hand-tight.
8. Tighten the 2 generator stud nuts.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. Install the lower generator air duct.
10. Tighten the generator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
11. Rotate the front end accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive
belt onto the pulleys.
12. Install the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Position the harness locator on the generator stud.
14. Connect the battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4184
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to
be programmed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4185
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4186
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will start.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4187
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4188
Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4189
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4190
Key: Testing and Inspection
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4191
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for
each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will start.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4192
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4193
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4194
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: When using the IDS, the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the Transmission Control Module
(TCM) parameters are reset at the same time.
NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be
executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security
access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 4195
NOTE: Repair all Battery Control Module (BCM) DTCs and make sure the high voltage disconnect
is installed before carrying out a parameter reset. A parameter reset will not occur if the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) is not working correctly.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the TCM were replaced, follow
Steps 4-9. If only the TCM was replaced, the
procedure is completed.
NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame
for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data
transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key).
7. Remove the key and cycle the second key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is
an IKT key).
8. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they
are IKT keys).
9. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys
are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will
transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate.
If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4199
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4200
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications
Starter Motor: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications > Page 4205
Starter Motor: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4206
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Starter Motor - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the starter solenoid battery cable nut and disconnect the starter motor solenoid terminal
cover and cables.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
6. Remove the ground wire nut and position aside the ground wire.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the starter motor.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > General Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 4212
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 4215
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4216
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles Of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure
differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power
point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter
or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position.
This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter
outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green
LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is
operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a
fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to
flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected
(short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off
(without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical
loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Inspection And Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4219
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer
to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4220
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
P1A0C
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4221
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4222
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35
(YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s).
TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4223
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02
(OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side
and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side;
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4224
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4225
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4226
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4227
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See:
Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing
and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4228
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter
See: Hybrid Drive Systems/Power Control System/Voltage Converter/Service and Repair/Direct
Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4229
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4232
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4233
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4234
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Locations Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4242
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4243
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4244
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4245
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4246
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4247
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4248
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4249
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4250
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4251
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4252
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4253
Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4254
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Application and ID Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4257
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4258
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4259
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4260
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4261
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4262
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4263
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4264
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4265
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4266
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4267
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4268
Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4269
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4274
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4275
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4276
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4279
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4280
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4281
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4282
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4283
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4284
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4285
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4286
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4287
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4288
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4292
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4293
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4294
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4295
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4296
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4297
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4298
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4299
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4300
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4301
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4302
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4303
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4304
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4308
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4313
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C210
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4314
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4315
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4316
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4317
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4318
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4319
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4320
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4321
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4322
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4323
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4324
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4325
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4326
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4328
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4329
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4330
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4331
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4332
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4333
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4334
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4335
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4336
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4337
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4338
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4341
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4342
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4343
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C133 > Page 4344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4348
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4356
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4360
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4368
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4369
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4370
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4371
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4375
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4376
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4377
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4378
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4380
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4384
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4385
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4390
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4391
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4392
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4393
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4396
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4397
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4398
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4399
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4400
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4401
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4402
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4406
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4407
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications > Page 4413
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console > Page 4416
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4417
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles Of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC current
with a rating of less than 150 watts. The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure
differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power
point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter
or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position.
This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter
outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green
LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is
operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a
fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to
flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected
(short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off
(without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical
loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
Inspection And Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4420
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the Self Test Diagnostics for the PCM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to this concern, go to the DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer
to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4421
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
P1A0C
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4422
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4423
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK CIRCUITS SBP04 (GN/RD) AND CBP35
(YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s).
TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4424
A2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUITS HYA01 (OG/GN) AND HYA02
(OG/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side
and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side;
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4425
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 cycle
110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Circuits
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP35 (YE/GY) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293a.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293a-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4426
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293a-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUITS LYA03 (YE/VT) AND RYA03 (BU/BN)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293b.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293b-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293b-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4427
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
WARNING: When servicing the high-voltage system, establish a buffer zone per the specified
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depower the high-voltage traction battery (HVTB) before carrying out any removal or
installation procedures affecting the high-voltage battery system. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition switch for a minimum of 5 minutes before removing high-voltage
cables. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color. The nominal high-voltage traction
battery voltage (HVTB) is 330 V DC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4428
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for
use. Refer to Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing in Battery. See: Starting
and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See:
Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4429
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457c, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100a, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457b, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter
See: Hybrid Drive Systems/Power Control System/Voltage Converter/Service and Repair/Direct
Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4430
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4433
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4434
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 4435
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Locations Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4443
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4444
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4445
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4446
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4447
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4448
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4449
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4450
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4451
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4452
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4453
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4454
Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4455
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Fuse: Application and ID Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4458
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4459
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4460
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4461
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4462
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4463
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4464
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4465
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4466
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4467
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4468
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4469
Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel > Page 4470
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4475
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4476
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4477
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4480
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4481
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4482
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4483
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4484
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4485
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4486
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4487
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4488
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4489
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4490
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4491
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4492
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4493
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4494
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4495
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4496
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4497
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4498
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4499
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4500
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4501
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4502
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4503
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4504
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 4505
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 4509
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4514
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C210
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4515
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4516
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4517
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4518
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4519
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4520
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4521
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4522
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4523
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4524
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4525
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4526
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4527
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4528
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4529
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4530
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4531
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4532
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4533
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4534
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4535
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4536
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4537
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4538
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4539
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4540
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4541
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4542
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4543
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4544
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C133 > Page 4545
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 4549
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4557
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB will not communicate), all
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE
devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful
configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a
successful self-test. The DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4561
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of
these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT will program the RKE function of the IKT key.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step will clear DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This will make sure that all displays are visible
under all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4569
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4570
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4571
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary Relay Box 1 > Page 4572
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4575
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4576
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4577
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4578
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4579
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4580
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4581
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4584
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4585
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4586
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary
Relay Box 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary
Relay Box 1 > Page 4591
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary
Relay Box 1 > Page 4592
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary
Relay Box 1 > Page 4593
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Auxiliary
Relay Box 1 > Page 4594
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4597
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4598
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4599
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4600
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4601
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4602
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4603
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4606
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4607
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4608
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation
Alignment: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance
Weight, and Tire Inflation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 4614
Alignment: Specifications Material
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 4615
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Ball Joint
Deflection, Ride Height, Side-to-Side Lean, Tire Balance Weight, and Tire Inflation > Page 4616
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4619
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4620
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4621
Alignment: Description and Operation Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4622
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4623
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 4624
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4627
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4628
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4629
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4630
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
- Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4631
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing of Steering. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4637
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4638
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4639
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring
System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 4646
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 4647
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking
Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking
Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4657
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4663
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4664
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub.
4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover.
Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4665
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nuts and bolts.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut.
- Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the brake disc.
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering
This vehicle is equipped with a Electric Power Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4673
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4674
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4675
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4680
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4681
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4682
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4688
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4689
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4690
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4691
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4692
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4693
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4694
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4695
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps
Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps > Page 4704
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4710
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Steering Gear - Exploded View
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front wheels and tires.
2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
- Remove the ignition key.
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the
coupling from the steering gear. To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts.
5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 4715
6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts.
- To install, tighten the new nuts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
7. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid)
8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.5L
9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All vehicles
10. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts.
- To install, tighten the new bolts to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft).
11. NOTE: For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid), it is necessary to grasp the
driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure
to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear.
Rotate the steering gear 90 degrees clockwise and remove it from the LH side of the vehicle.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 4716
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to Tie Rod End - Outer See: Tie
Rod/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Outer.
2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4725
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns > Page 4731
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 4732
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair
Steering Column Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel.
3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 4733
- Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside.
4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness
electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery
high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. Position the connectors and harnesses aside.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the
steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt is
accessible.
6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column shaft
coupling-to-steering column bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
- Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column.
9. Remove the 3 steering column dash seal nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft.
11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal.
13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft.
- Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash
seal.
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns >
Page 4742
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk
On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk
On Turns > Page 4748
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold
Temps
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold
Temps > Page 4767
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4773
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 4776
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4777
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring.
- Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside.
3. Remove the steering wheel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the Steering Wheel Puller to damage the steering wheel switch wires and
connector while removing the steering
wheel.
Using the Steering Wheel Puller, remove the steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4778
5. Tape the clockspring center rotor to the outer housing to keep it from rotating.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod End - Inner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully in the direction of the inner tie-rod end that is being removed.
3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
5. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle and
remove the tie rod.
6. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
7. Remove and discard the boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
8. Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack.
9. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie-rod end.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack while tightening the inner tie rod.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner > Page 4783
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Outer
Tie Rod End - Outer
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle.
5. Remove the outer tie-rod end.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint Deflection Lower...................................................................................................................
..................................................................................0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4793
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4794
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 >
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 >
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 4804
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09
> Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On
Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09
> Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 4810
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4811
Front Cross-Member: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4812
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4813
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4814
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4815
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 4816
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-22-19 > Nov >
09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member Bushing: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On
Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-22-19 > Nov >
09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 4825
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: >
09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone
Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: >
09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 4831
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4832
Front Cross-Member Bushing: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4833
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4834
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4835
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4836
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page
4837
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking
Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking
Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4846
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 4852
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4853
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub.
4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover.
Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4854
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nuts and bolts.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut.
- Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the brake disc.
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 4858
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 4859
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the brake drum.
4. Using the Front Hub Remover or equivalent, separate the CV joint from the wheel hub.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the outer Constant Velocity (CV) joint from the wheel
hub. Damage to the threads and
internal outer CV joint components may result.
Using the Front Hub Remover or equivalent and the Impact Slide Hammer or equivalent, separate
the outer CV joint from the wheel hub.
6. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 4860
Using a suitable press and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, press the inner
bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
7. Remove the brake shoes.
8. Remove the parking brake cable bracket-to-control arm bolt.
9. Unclip the wheel speed harness retainer from the parking brake cable and disconnect the cable
from the brake backing plate.
10. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
11. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle, and position the sensor and
harness aside.
12. Remove the stabilizer bar link lower nut and disconnect the link from the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nut.
13. Remove the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring (
Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension.
14. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut.
15. Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam.
16. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
17. Remove the wheel knuckle.
18. Remove the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Installation
1. Install the wheel bearing. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. NOTICE: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping.
NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks.
NOTE: Do not tighten the wheel knuckle bolt at this time.
Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub and install the wheel knuckle. Hold the cam nut stationary and loosely install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
3. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the new lower ball joint nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Spring See: Suspension Spring ( Coil /
Leaf )/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension.
5. Connect the stabilizer bar link and install the nut.
- Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
6. Position the wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor.
7. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 4861
8. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable
bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. Install the brake shoes and the brake drum.
10. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
11. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install a new wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
12. Bleed the brake system.
13. With the weight of the vehicle on the wheel and tire, tighten the wheel knuckle bolt to 125 Nm
(92 lb-ft).
14. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented
with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar bushing bracket bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket.
- Discard the bolts.
- To install, tighten the new bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 4874
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 4880
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4881
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove or install the stabilizer bar link nuts. Damage to the
stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots may occur.
NOTICE: Do not hold the stabilizer bar link boot with any tool or damage to the boot may occur.
NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway
torque.
NOTE: When installing the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar, make sure the stabilizer bar is
perpendicular to the stabilizer link when tightening the link nut or the link nut may not seat properly.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove and discard the lower stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new
parts.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4891
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4892
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4898
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4899
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4900
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4901
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4902
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4903
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4904
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 4905
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4906
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4907
Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4908
Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4909
Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4910
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4911
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4912
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4921
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4922
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4928
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4929
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4930
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4931
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4932
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4933
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4934
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 4935
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4944
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4945
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4951
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4952
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4953
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4954
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4955
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4956
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4957
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 4958
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4959
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4960
All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position
the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4961
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4970
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4971
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4977
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 4978
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4979
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4980
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4981
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4982
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4983
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 4984
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4989
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant
velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Suspension
Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Suspension
Spring
NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicle similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4990
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and position the brake tube and bracket
assembly aside.
4. Using a suitable jackstand, support the wheel knuckle.
5. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut, washer and bolt.
6. Remove the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
7. Loosen the lower arm inner bolt.
8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulators and coil spring for installation.
Using the jackstand, carefully lower the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the coil spring.
Installation
1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulators to the previously noted position.
2. Using a suitable jackstand, carefully raise the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new shock absorber lower bolt, washer and nut.
- Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Install the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
5. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4991
6. Install the brake tube bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
7. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
8. Bleed the rear wheel cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4992
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4993
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5002
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5003
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5009
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5010
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 10-18-3 >
Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 10-18-3 >
Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 5016
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 10-18-3 >
Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 5022
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5025
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod constant
velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Suspension
Rear Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5026
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Using a suitable jackstand, support the rear suspension.
4. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nut and bushing assembly.
- To install, tighten the new nut and bushing assembly to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the shock absorber.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5027
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5028
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5033
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5034
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5035
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5036
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5037
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Rear Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 5051
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 5052
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
5058
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
5059
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5064
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See:
Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5065
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5066
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5067
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service
and Repair.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5068
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Suspension/Rear Knuckle/Service
and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front Install the new wheel hub nut Tighten to.....................................................................................
..............................................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Install the 5 wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to.......................................
............................................................................................................................................................1
35 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5078
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5079
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature
Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE
12/17/2008
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
WSM, Section 412-00.
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),
AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature
Variations > Page 5090
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side
Temperature Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Side To Side Temperature
Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE
12/17/2008
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
WSM, Section 412-00.
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),
AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side
Temperature Variations > Page 5096
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 >
Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 >
Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 5102
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 >
Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 5108
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Air Inlet Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5111
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5112
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5113
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5114
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Air Inlet Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5117
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5118
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5119
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Air Inlet Door Actuator > Page 5120
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Procedures
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Removal and Installation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2
auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5123
3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim
4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove
the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To
install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in)
5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9.
Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector
10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the
screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5124
actuator screws. ^
Disconnect the rod.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode
door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM)
self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5125
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Removal and Replacement
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the
instrument panel.
1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5126
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing.
2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC),
the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On
vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend
door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle.
1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel.
2. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw.
4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct
screw
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5127
5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of
the Audio Control Module (ACM).
Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
2. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer
above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
8. NOTICE: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the
plenum chamber when removing the
screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to
jam, or may cause noise concerns.
NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the
RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5128
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles
equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator.
For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH See: Temperature Blend Door
Actuator - RH.
1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5129
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 2 auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket will remain in place.
Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel.
4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly.
Remove the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct
assembly.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5130
5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt and remove the D-pillar bracket.
9. Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector.
10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the
screws.
Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator screws.
- Disconnect the rod.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator.
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode
door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM)
self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5139
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5140
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5146
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5147
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Air Duct: Removal and Replacement
Footwell Duct - Rear
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats.
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 5150
5. NOTE: Position the carpet to gain access to the floor ducts.
Separate the wiring harness from the LH floor duct and position aside.
6. Remove the LH floor duct.
7. Remove the RH floor duct pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the RH floor duct.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 5151
Air Duct: Overhaul
Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 5152
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
2. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM).
3. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC).
4. Remove the instrument panel.
5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter.
6. Remove the 4 Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM.
- Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws.
8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws.
9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts.
10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 5153
11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker.
12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw.
13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws.
14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors.
15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws.
16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws.
17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws.
18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the LH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly.
19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the RH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly.
20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5162
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5163
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 5169
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 5170
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side
Register - Passenger Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the passenger side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 5173
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center
Register - Center
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish
panel assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 5174
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side
Register - Driver Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the driver side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5178
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5179
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations >
M/E Coolant Pump Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations >
M/E Coolant Pump Motor > Page 5184
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams >
Heater Pump Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams >
Heater Pump Motor > Page 5187
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5188
Auxiliary Water Pump: Description and Operation
Heater Pump
The heater pump is required to maintain engine coolant flow to the heater core for passenger
compartment heating when the engine is not running. The PCM commands the heater pump on by
energizing the heater pump control relay (HPCR).
The pump is commanded on when the following conditions are met:
- The key is in the ON/START position.
- The engine coolant temperature is above a minimum threshold 0°C (32°F) nominal.
- The inferred ambient temperature is below a calibrated value 32°C (90°F) nominal.
- The engine speed is below a calibrated threshold (nominal 4,000 RPM) including engine OFF.
- The climate control mode switch is in any position other than OFF.
The pump is off when the climate control mode switch is set to OFF.
Heater Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5189
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Drain the engine coolant.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5190
- Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component Information >
Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay > Component Information >
Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay > Page 5195
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5201
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5202
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5203
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5204
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5205
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5206
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5207
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5208
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5209
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5210
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5211
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5212
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5213
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5214
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5215
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5216
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5217
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5218
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5219
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5220
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5221
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged
from the heater core and evaporator core housing.
3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower
motor.
Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower
motor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Blower Motor Resistor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5228
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Resistor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor resistor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5233
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
AIR DISTRIBUTION
NOTE: A cabin air filter is available as a dealer-installed accessory.
The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the right hand side of the cowl
panel grill, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
5237
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
AIR DISTRIBUTION
NOTE: A cabin air filter is available as a dealer-installed accessory.
The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the right hand side of the cowl
panel grill, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5242
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 5245
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Air gap between pulley and clutch
plate..................................................................................................................................0.35-0.75
mm (0.014-0.030 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5250
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C
clutch pulley.
2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers
between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft
until the clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5254
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
Clutch and Clutch Field Coil - Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5255
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - Hybrid See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub nut.
1. Using the Compressor Clutch Holding Tool, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub nut.
3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub.
4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring.
5. NOTICE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch pulley or A/C
compressor may result.
Using the Compressor Pulley Remover, remove the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil snap ring.
7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
1. Remove the thermal protection switch bolt and bracket.
2. Detach the thermal protection switch from the A/C compressor.
8. Remove the A/C clutch field coil and thermal protection switch assembly.
Installation
NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with a clutch and pulley. If not, the A/C clutch
components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found. If excessive grooving is
found, a new A/C clutch disc and hub and a new A/C compressor pulley must be installed together.
Otherwise, each component can be installed individually where needed.
1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for
damage.
- Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to
excessive heat.
- Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor
pulley that is more than fingernail depth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5256
- Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing.
2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
3. Apply a pea-sized drop of silicone sealant to the thermal protection switch socket in the A/C
compressor housing.
4. Install the A/C clutch field coil.
1. Install the A/C clutch field coil.
2. Install the thermal protection switch and bracket.
3. Tighten the thermal protection switch bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. NOTE: The A/C compressor pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor. It must be correctly
aligned during installation.
Install the A/C compressor pulley.
1. Install the A/C Compressor Pulley Installer.
2. Install the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline
opening.
8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub.
9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub nut.
1. Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with the Compressor Clutch Holding Tool.
2. Tighten the nut to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5257
11. Install the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - Hybrid See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5261
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay
The A/C clutch relay (may be referred to as the wide open throttle (WOT) A/C cutoff relay) is wired
normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic
automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal
indicating that A/C is requested. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs
that are available. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the wide open throttle A/C
cut-off (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
A/C Condenser
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of
the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes
to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
On 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the
condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5265
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Condenser Core - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is
removed from the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the motor electronics cooler.
4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets.
6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5266
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 condenser bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser core.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Removal and Installation
NOTE: When installing a new HVAC module on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual
Temperature Control (EMTC), the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be
carried out to configure the new module to the vehicle. Refer to Information Bus.
1. Remove the middle center instrument panel finish panel.
2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws.
3. Remove the HVAC module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module > Page 5271
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Passenger Zone Valve
Passenger Zone Valve
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the 2 passenger zone valve fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Remove the passenger zone valve.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 > Mar > 11 > A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 > Mar > 11 > A/C - Poor Cooling
Performance
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 5285
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 5286
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 5287
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Line Fittings
NOTICE: Use only a plastic or nonmetallic tool for removing O-ring seals and gasket seals from the
refrigerant line fittings. Use of a metallic tool will create scratches on the sealing surface of the
fitting that can result in refrigerant system leaks.
Whenever a refrigerant line fitting is disconnected, the fitting must be cleaned of any foreign
material and new O-ring seals and/or gasket seals must be installed. Use only the O-ring seals and
gasket seals specified in the Ford Master Parts Catalog.
If a refrigerant system line fitting must remain disconnected for an extended period of time, it
should be capped to avoid contamination of the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Front
Material
Front Connection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front > Page 5298
Intermediate Connection
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. See: Refrigerant
3. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
^ Discard the 0-ring seal and gasket seal.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front > Page 5299
4. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator inlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
^ Discard the 0-ring seal.
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and
disconnect the fittings.
^ Discard the 0-ring seals.
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in)
6. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line bracket bolt. To install, tighten to 6 Nm
(53 lb-in). 7. Remove the auxiliary line dash panel bracket nut and detach the bracket. To install,
tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE: The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation. Remove the 2 auxiliary line bracket
retainers and the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket seal and new 0-nag seals.
^ Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. See: Refrigerant
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front > Page 5300
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Rear
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Rear
Material
Rear Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown
NOTE: This vehicle is not equipped with an in-line Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) filter in the
auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front > Page 5301
Intermediate Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines Shown.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
NOTE: The rear auxiliary evaporator outlet end inlet lines are installed from the factory as
one-piece assemblies which must be cut for removal Replacement lines must be installed if the
lines are cut The replacement parts are supplied as separate kits containing multiple piece lines for
ease of installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. See: Refrigerant
3. Remove the 2 rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear fitting nuts and disconnect the
fittings
^ Discard the 0-ring seals
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in)
4. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear bracket bolt
^ To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in)
5. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with factory lines, it is necessary to cut the rear auxiliary
evaporator outlet and inlet lines for removal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Auxiliary Evaporation Outlet and Inlet-Front > Page 5302
If equipped, disconnect the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line tube-O fittings. ^
Discard the 0-ring seals
^ To install, tighten the 3/8-inch inlet line tube-0 fitting to 10 Nm (89 lb-in)
^ To install, tighten the 5/8-inch Outlet line tube-0 fitting to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and disconnect
the fittings.
^ Discard the 0-ring seals
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in
7. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line front bracket bolt.
^ To install, tighten 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation Remove the 2 rear auxiliary line
bracket retainers and remove the lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure
^ Install new 0-ring seals
^ Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. See: Refrigerant Oil
10. Evacuate, teak test and charge the refrigerant system. See: Refrigerant
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents
Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents > Page 5311
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents > Page 5312
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents
Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents > Page 5318
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents > Page 5319
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5320
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Core
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator core is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator
core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core
through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower
motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5321
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from
the A/C system.
3. Clean the fittings.
4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator
core/TXV tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the
evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not
completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant
leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or
condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser
core.
If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and
recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator
core or condenser core. TEST the system for normal operation.
If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the
evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. TEST the system
for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5325
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 5328
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET is connected to the dual automatic temperature control (DATC). Evaporator temperature
is transmitted to the PCM from the DATC through the controller area network (CAN).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 5329
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Air Conditioning
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) TXV is used for High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) cooling on
hybrid vehicles.
The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the
engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the
high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure
sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes
through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the
temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type
valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the
amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) > Page 5334
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Transducer (2.5L or 3.0L [4V] Only)
The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with
the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure
transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge
conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the
PCM will not allow the clutch to engage.
The A/C pressure transducer is located on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the
refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control - Hybrid
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Auxiliary Climate Control - Hybrid
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
NOTE: The auxiliary Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) is not interchangeable with the front
(main) system TXV.
1. Remove the auxiliary climate control housing. For additional information, refer to Auxiliary
Climate Control Housing See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Auxiliary Climate Control Housing.
2. Remove the TXV-to-lower bracket nut and disconnect the lower TXV fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
3. NOTE: The upper TXV fitting is equipped with 2 O-ring seals not shown in graphic.
Remove the 2 TXV-to-upper bracket bolts and remove the TXV. Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the TXV.
5. Remove the TXV stud.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control - Hybrid > Page 5337
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Climate Control
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure.
- If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten
the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 5342
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 5343
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 5344
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 5345
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Description and Operation
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Dual-Function Pressure Switch (Hybrid Only)
The dual-function pressure switch is located on the receiver/drier and includes 2 separate sets of
contacts that are opened at 2 different pressures.
The first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor
operation in the event of excessively high discharge pressure in the high-pressure side of the
refrigerant system. The PCM monitors the first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch
in-series with the low-charge protection switch. When the contacts are open, the PCM will
disengage the A/C compressor clutch.
The second set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used by the PCM to engage the
high-speed cooling fan. When the A/C pressure rises above a preset level, the second set of
contacts will close and the high-speed cooling fan will be engaged.
The dual-function pressure switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the
receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the dual-function pressure
switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 5349
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Relief Valve - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service
part.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor manifold bolt and disconnect the compressor manifold and tube
from the A/C compressor.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 evaporator outlet line fitting nuts.
- Discard the O-ring seals and gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5354
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5355
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5356
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5357
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5358
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5359
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5360
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the passenger zone valve nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
10. Detach the evaporator inlet line from the A/C line bracket.
11. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
13. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5361
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor manifold bolt and disconnect the compressor manifold and tube
from the A/C compressor.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 evaporator outlet line fitting nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5362
- Discard the O-ring seals and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor manifold and tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor To Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5363
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Condenser To Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5364
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5365
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5366
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the passenger zone valve nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector.
10. Detach the evaporator inlet line from the A/C line bracket.
11. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
13. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Front
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Front
Front Connection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5367
Intermediate Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5368
3. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator inlet line front fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and
disconnect the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Remove the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Remove the auxiliary line dash panel bracket nut and detach the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE: The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation.
Remove the 2 auxiliary line bracket retainers and the front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet
lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket seal and new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Rear
Auxiliary Evaporator Outlet and Inlet Line - Rear
Rear Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
NOTE: This vehicle is not equipped with an in-line Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) filter in the
auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5369
Intermediate Connection
NOTE: A/C service lines shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5370
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
NOTE: The rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet lines are installed from the factory as
one-piece assemblies which must be cut for removal. Replacement lines must be installed if the
lines are cut. The replacement parts are supplied as separate kits containing multiple piece lines
for ease of installation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the 2 rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear fitting nuts and disconnect the
fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with factory lines, it is necessary to cut the rear auxiliary
evaporator outlet and inlet lines for removal.
If equipped, disconnect the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line tube-O fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten the 3/8-inch inlet line tube-O fitting to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- To install, tighten the 5/8-inch outlet line tube-O fitting to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 front auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line mid-joint fitting nuts and disconnect
the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line front bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
8. NOTE: The auxiliary line bracket retainers are unscrewed for removal and pushed into place for
installation.
Remove the 2 rear auxiliary line bracket retainers and remove the lines.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5371
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the A/C line bracket.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new O-ring and new gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly > Page 5372
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
8. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Auxiliary Climate Control Housing
Auxiliary Climate Control Housing
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the 2 auxiliary evaporator outlet and inlet line rear fitting nuts and disconnect the
fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5377
4. Remove the 2 auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket will remain in place.
Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel.
6. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly.
Remove the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct
assembly.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the 2 auxiliary harness electrical connectors.
10. Disconnect the auxiliary evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the auxiliary climate control housing.
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
13. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5378
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Removal and Installation
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the instrument panel.
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5379
5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core.
6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing in the following sequence.
1. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs.
2. Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle
while pulling the housing toward the RH door
opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct.
3. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Disassembly and Assembly
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5380
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5381
Disassembly and Assembly
Plenum chamber
1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber.
3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. Remove the plenum chamber.
Air inlet duct
7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct.
8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
Complete disassembly
10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness.
11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Auxiliary Climate Control Housing > Page 5382
13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal.
14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
15. Remove the heater core.
16. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) dash panel seal.
17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal.
18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped).
19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped).
20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core
and evaporator core housing.
21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor.
22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Humidity Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Humidity Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
5386
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Receiver/Drier
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at
the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser
core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from
the refrigerant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5390
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
Receiver Drier - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
NOTE: The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the
receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not
necessary to install a new receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5391
3. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the dual-function pressure switch electrical connector and detach the wire harness
from the receiver/drier bracket stud.
6. Remove the auxiliary evaporator inlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the receiver/drier inlet and outlet fitting nuts and disconnect the outlet fitting.
- Discard the outlet fitting O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts and disconnect the receiver/drier inlet fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Remove the receiver/drier.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 5396
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................................1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5397
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customers initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 5400
facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use
the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All
contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow
the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing .
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 5401
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 5402
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of
refrigerants as outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer's procedures and instructions.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new suction
accumulator or receiver/drier, Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) or evaporator core orifice and
any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system.
Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material.
These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers
can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The filter is intended for use
on one vehicle only.
1. Orient the filter inlet toward the A/C condenser core.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit are designed for
low-pressure flushing and are not
designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections
using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur.
NOTE: The F8VZ-19E773-AB pancake filter is not permanently installed and will be removed at the
end of this procedure.
Disconnect the condenser outlet fitting and temporarily install the pancake filter between the 2
halves of the fitting.
- Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
- Make the connections using the correct adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit and/or A/C Flush
and Purge Fitting Kit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 5403
3. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. For additional
information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See:
Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
5. Check all refrigerant system hoses, lines and the position of the newly installed filters to be sure
they do not interfere with other engine
compartment components. If necessary, use tie straps to make adjustments.
6. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Select A/C
operation and set the blower motor speed to maximum.
Start the engine and let it idle briefly. Make sure the A/C system is operating correctly.
7. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and
Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
10. Remove the adapters, flexible hoses and pancake filter from between the condenser and the
condenser to evaporator tube.
11. Discard the pancake filter. It can be used one time only.
12. Reconnect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Evacuate, charge and leak-test the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Zone Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Zone Valve > Page 5408
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5409
Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Distribution Valve (ACRDV)
The ACRDV is a PCM-controlled solenoid that provides a regulated control of refrigerant flow to the
passenger compartment loop. The PCM opens or closes the ACRDV based on the passenger
compartment A/C request. The ACRDV is a normally closed valve, preventing the refrigerant flow.
When the passenger compartment A/C is requested ON, the PCM provides a ground path to the
solenoid which opens the ACRDV.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Distribution Valve (ACRDV)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5410
Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair
Battery Zone Valve
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The battery zone valve is not interchangeable with the passenger zone valve.
1. Remove the auxiliary climate control housing. For additional information, refer to Auxiliary
Climate Control Housing See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Auxiliary Climate Control Housing.
2. Remove the 2 battery zone valve screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
3. Loosen the nuts and disconnect the battery zone valve tube-O fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the battery zone valve.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
....................................325 ml (11 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 5415
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
....................................325 ml (11 fl oz) See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5416
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTE: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a
small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed,
some of the PAG oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is
necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of PAG oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the
total system PAG oil capacity must be added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
PAG oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement
Service A/C compressors shipped without clutch and pulley
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 oz), pour the
same amount plus 30 ml (1 oz) of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
(YN-12-D) WSH M1C231-B or equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5417
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 oz),
pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or
equivalent into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 oz), pour
85 ml (3 oz) of clean A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) or equivalent into the new
A/C compressor.
Service A/C compressors shipped with clutch and pulley
2. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 6 to 8 revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 89 ml (3 oz), remove 118 ml
(4 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 89 ml (3 oz), remove 89 ml (3 oz) from
the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 118 ml (4 oz), remove 59 ml (2 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is 148 ml (5 oz), remove 29 ml (1 oz)
from the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 148 ml (5 oz), remove 0
ml (0 oz) from the new A/C compressor.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Replacement
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new suction accumulator or
receiver drier only has been installed. If a new A/C compressor and evaporator core orifice or TXV
have also been installed due to system contamination, refer to the appropriate heading.
1. Drill one 12.7 mm (1/2 in) hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain
the oil into a clean measuring cup.
2. Add the same quantity of new PAG oil, plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery and
60 ml (2 fl oz).
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Multiple Component Replacement After A/C System Contamination
NOTE: This refrigerant oil adding method is to be used when a new A/C compressor, suction
accumulator or receiver drier and evaporator core orifice or TXV have been installed due to system
contamination and the A/C system has been flushed.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Add 60 ml (2 fl oz) directly to the new A/C compressor suction port.
2. Inject the total vehicle PAG oil capacity minus 60 ml (2 fl oz) to the low-side service port during
system charging. For the total PAG oil capacity
specification, refer to the Specifications table.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector, from the R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set, along with the
PAG oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector and the correct adapters from the R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean, new PAG oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5418
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. For refrigerant
containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that
would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Low Pressure Switch
The A/C low pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. This normally
closed switch opens when the refrigerant pressure drops below 152 kPa (22 psi). This results in the
A/C turning off, preventing the evaporator from freezing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Auxiliary Water Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > M/E Coolant Pump Relay > Page 5431
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5438
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Relay
The A/C clutch relay (may be referred to as the wide open throttle (WOT) A/C cutoff relay) is wired
normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic
automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal
indicating that A/C is requested. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs
that are available. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the wide open throttle A/C
cut-off (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 > Mar > 11 >
A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-9 >
Mar > 11 > A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Cooling Performance
TSB 11-3-9
03/15/11
HYBRID - LACK OF A/C COOLING
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner Hybrid vehicles equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit a lack of A/C cooling. Low battery voltage during a
previous vehicle start may cause the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) module to function
in conventional gasoline mode instead of hybrid vehicle mode.
ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. To determine if the HVAC control module has defaulted to gasoline mode, first turn off the A/C
and Recirculated Air buttons on the HVAC control
head.
2. Turn off the HVAC control head.
3. Press the ECON button, the yellow led will light up.
4. Does the A/C and recirculated air buttons also light up when the ECON button is pressed?
a. Yes - HVAC module is in gasoline mode, proceed to Step 5.
b. No - HVAC module is not in gas mode, this procedure does not apply.
5. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 71.00 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11
DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110309A 2009 Escape and Mariner 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Reprogram The HAVC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19980 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5452
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5453
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5454
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5459
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5460
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5464
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5465
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5469
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5470
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown. In-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 5473
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5480
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning > Page 5483
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Engine Control Components
Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor
The ACET is connected to the dual automatic temperature control (DATC). Evaporator temperature
is transmitted to the PCM from the DATC through the controller area network (CAN).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5484
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Humidity Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Humidity Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5488
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. For refrigerant
containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that
would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Low Pressure Switch
The A/C low pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. This normally
closed switch opens when the refrigerant pressure drops below 152 kPa (22 psi). This results in the
A/C turning off, preventing the evaporator from freezing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5504
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5505
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5506
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5507
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5508
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5509
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5510
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5511
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5521
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5522
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Service Gauge Port Valves
The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line.
The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line.
NOTE: Different valve cores are used for different engine applications. Use only the valve core
listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the vehicle and fitting being serviced.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
- Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
- A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the
service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core
can be installed if the seal leaks excessively.
- The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent
leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten
the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Solar Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5531
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5532
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5533
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5534
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5535
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5536
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5537
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5538
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5539
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5540
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5541
Solar Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5542
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5543
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5544
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5545
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5546
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5547
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5548
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5550
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5551
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
SOLAR AMPLIFIER (SUNLOAD SENSOR)
The solar amplifier (dual-channel sunload sensor), supplies information to the DATC module
indicating LH side and RH side sunload. The sunload senor is capable of sensing the intensity and
direction of the solar rediation entering the cabin of the car through the windshield for comfort of the
driver and front passenger. The smart junction box processes this information to control the air
conditioning system. For information on the location and service of the sunload sensor. See:
Locations Diagrams By Number, Diagram set 55-004 Auto Climate Control System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5552
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the A/C sunload sensor from the instrument panel upper finish panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information procedures prior to carrying
out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable
devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a
new RCM. DTCs must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out.
Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components,
carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
System Reset procedure as instructed in the diagnostic/repair information. Refer to the appropriate
diagnostic/repair information for OCS system removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include
the following procedures for the specified system: For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be
cleared.
- For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231/B1193:00 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder-type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
- Steering column (deployable column if equipped)
- Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points
- Instrument panel braces and brackets
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5558
- Instrument panel and mounting points
- Seats and seat mounting points
- Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to Seat
Belt Systems
- SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5559
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision
1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware
must be inspected by an authorized
dealer to verify correct function: Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching
areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and
distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5565
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5566
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5567
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5568
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5569
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5570
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5571
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5572
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 5577
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 5578
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 5579
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5582
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5583
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5584
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5585
Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5586
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 5587
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag: Service and Repair Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim cover from
the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may damage the passenger air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the soft pack
becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks during the
removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air
bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
1. Remove the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation.
3. Carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover from the bottom of the air bag module canister,
separating the windows from the canister hooks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5590
4. NOTE: Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling.
Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the
canister hooks.
Installation
1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping
package.
2. WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft pack before
assembly. If any foreign objects are found,
remove them before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If the canister or
soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the
passenger air bag cover to the canister.
3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure.
4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air
bag cover windows.
5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks.
6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a
hook installed and the sides are not tucked or
folded against the air bag canister.
7. Install the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
8. NOTE: The video procedure utilizes a Fusion/Milan passenger air bag module assembly. It also
applies to vehicles with similar passenger air bag
module designs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5591
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
Driver Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
3. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5592
4. Disconnect the horn and 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air
bag module.
Installation
1. Connect the driver air bag module and horn electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during
installation.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and seat the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated, gently pull outward at the corners of the
driver air bag module to make sure all 3 hooks are fully seated. Check the driver air bag module
and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5593
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
Passenger Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or discolored
passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be serviced separately from the
passenger air bag module assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover Passenger See: Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the passenger
air bag cover. Failure to follow these
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5594
instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger air bag cover
clips are fully seated into the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module passenger air bag
cover clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
4. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
5. NOTICE: During installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip
is attached to the passenger air bag
module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5595
Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module
Safety Canopy Module
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live Safety Canopy(R), or side air curtain module, with the
module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Anytime the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module has deployed, a new
headliner and new A-, B- and C-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed.
Remove any other damaged components and hardware and install new components and hardware
as needed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air
curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5596
NOTE: There are different safety canopy modules for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and
vehicles without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a
new safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle
application.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the headliner.
3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar.
4. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, note the
roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose position and routing for
installation purposes.
5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
6. Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the
D-pillar.
7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace.
8. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars).
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, disconnect the drain hose.
10. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose
aside.
11. Remove the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1
between the B- and C-pillars).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5597
12. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar.
13. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook.
Installation
WARNING: Before installing a Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for
any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural
integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side
air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a Safety Canopy(R)
module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in
the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with Safety Canopy(R) or side
air curtain modules, make sure the headliner has the word AIRBAG on the headliner where it
meets each B-pillar trim panel. Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module not deploying or deploying
incorrectly, increasing the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
1. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R)
in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is
mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install new safety canopy module J-nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5598
2. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of
correct roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear
window solvent hose routing.
Position the safety canopy module and insert the rear hook into the sheet metal cavity.
3. Hook the safety canopy module into the C-pillar.
4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar.
6. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch
the front roof opening panel drain hose and/or
rear window washer solvent hose.
Install the A-pillar tether bolt.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and
C-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip.
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, connect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5599
10. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar.
11. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace.
12. Install the remaining 2 rear safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and
D-pillars).
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Install the headliner.
14. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5600
Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module
Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5601
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1. Remove the rear screw.
- For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws.
2. Push the side shield forward to release.
3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring
harness could become damaged when
the seat is moved.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach
the 3 wiring harness routing retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar
support cable.
5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats
6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip.
The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from
the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully
separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module.
9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5602
10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module.
12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2
side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag
module.
Installation
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage and may cause system failure.
All seats
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5603
1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips.
7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat
cushion.
8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 5604
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
9. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats
10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical
connector and attach it to the seat track.
11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw.
12. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5608
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5609
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5610
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5611
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5612
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5613
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5614
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5615
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical
connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5625
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
Clockspring
Removal
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle.
4. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
Remove the steering wheel.
5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an
assembly.
Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly.
6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever
and remove the lower steering column shroud.
7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 screws and clockspring.
Installation
1. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the
steering wheel is installed. If the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5626
anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be
centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Install the clockspring and 2 screws.
2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
3. Install the lower steering column shroud and 3 screws.
4. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud.
5. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt,
repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the
clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal
connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to Step
7.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering
wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor
counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance.
Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point.
6. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate
the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to
center the clockspring.
Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the
window.
- the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock
position.
- the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position.
7. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring, make sure the road wheels are in the 12 o'clock
position to install the steering wheel.
Install the steering wheel.
8. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5627
9. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5632
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5633
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5634
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5635
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5636
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5637
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5638
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5639
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5640
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5643
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5644
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5645
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5646
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5647
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5648
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5651
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5652
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5656
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5660
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5663
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an
assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5664
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5665
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5666
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5667
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5668
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5669
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5670
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5671
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5672
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5673
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5677
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5678
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5683
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5684
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5685
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5686
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5687
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: When installing a new Restraints Control Module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out
Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled. The RCM and Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) must be configured
correctly to fully support 911 assist functionality.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5688
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5689
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5690
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 5694
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5700
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5701
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5702
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5703
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5704
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5705
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5706
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5707
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover
first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end.
2. Remove the bolt and child safety seat tether anchor.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the
child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death to the child in a sudden stop or crash.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5712
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Buckles
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. When the pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a crash that results in pretensioner deployment, a new safety belt buckle
and pretensioner must be installed.
For safety belt buckle and pretensioner diagnosis and disposal information, refer to Air Bag
Systems.
Second row safety belt buckles
The second row safety belt buckles can be serviced separately. After any crash, new safety belt
systems components (including retractors and buckles) must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 5716
Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Buckle and Tongue
The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching
function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female
portion).
1. Verify the following during the latching sequence:
- Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort.
- A click is heard when the safety belt buckle latches the tongue.
2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the safety belt webbing.
3. Unlatch the safety belt by fully depressing the safety belt buckle release button and allowing the
safety belt to release and retract.
4. Verify the following during the unlatching process:
- Push-button depression does not require excessive effort.
- The tongue can be removed easily from the buckle.
5. Repeat the above steps 3 times.
6. If the functional test reveals a concern(s), install a new safety belt buckle or safety belt retractor
as required.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Power Seat (Driver Only)
Manual Seat
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5719
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the seat.
2. Remove the screws and inboard seat cushion side shield.
3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for correct installation.
Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle and
pretensioner.
5. For the driver seat, remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt
buckle and pretensioner.
6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat
track and detach the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5720
9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5721
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat
cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward.
Remove the bolt and rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
2. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5726
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5729
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the
bottom.
2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5733
3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Retractors
- Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only)
- Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat)
- BTS (front passenger only)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is
automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking
sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will
not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt
webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test
procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during
braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature
helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
The safety belt retractor must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt
webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions.
1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions.
2. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
3. Install a new safety belt retractor if any concern is found or the complaint has been verified.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5745
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
1. Position the seat backrest fully upright (if adjustable).
2. Position the safety belt shoulder height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position.
3. Fasten the safety belt.
4. Pull out the safety belt webbing until the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature is activated.
5. Allow the safety belt webbing to retract until it stops.
6. Pull on the safety belt webbing to check that the safety belt retractor has remained in the ALR
mode. If the safety belt retractor is not locked,
install a new safety belt retractor.
7. Unfasten the safety belt and allow the safety belt webbing to retract to its stowed position.
8. Pull out and retract the safety belt webbing to verify the safety belt retractor has converted
automatically out of ALR mode. If the safety belt
retractor remains locked in the ALR mode, install a new safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5746
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test
Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification.
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection
WARNING: The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
safety belt retractor does not lock. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive slack in the safety belt webbing across the torso during
testing.
NOTE: Do not jerk on the safety belt webbing when carrying out this test.
1. Test the safety belts in the following sequence:
1. Fasten the safety belts and proceed to a safe area.
2. Attain a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph).
3. WARNING: Apply maximum brake force only on dry concrete or equivalent hard surface,
NEVER on wet pavement or gravel.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Grasp the shoulder harness, lean forward and apply the brakes, making a maximum braking
application without a skid.
4. The safety belts should lock up with minimum webbing extension.
5. If there is a lockup of all safety belt retractors being tested, the safety belt retractors are
functioning correctly. If any safety belt retractor fails
to lock up, install a new safety belt retractor(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Retractor
NOTE: Passenger side shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5749
belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in
a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install a new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the
cover out at the bottom.
3. Remove the bolt and D-ring.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
5. For passenger retractor, disconnect the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) electrical connector.
6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. Disconnect the pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and
Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5750
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5751
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest.
2. Remove the head restraints.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover.
4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws.
5. Remove the seat latch release lever.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever.
- To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release lever.
6. Remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
9. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
NOTE: The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and pull the 4 guides out of the frame tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5752
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
14. Remove the nut and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5753
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the cover and D-ring bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5754
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5762
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5763
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5764
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5765
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5766
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Safety Belt Retractors
- Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only)
- Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat)
- BTS (front passenger only)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is
automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking
sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will
not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt
webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test
procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during
braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature
helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5775
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5776
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5777
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5778
Impact Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5779
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5780
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5781
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5782
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 5783
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5786
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5787
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5788
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5789
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5790
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 5791
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5794
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5795
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5800
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5803
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Customer Service Division Master Parts and Accessories Catalog.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5810
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5814
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5815
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5816
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5817
sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS
fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5818
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5819
Removal
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification
System Module (OCSM)) must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the
OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5820
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5821
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5822
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5823
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5827
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5828
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Accessory Control Display: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accessory Control Display: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 >
Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Accessory Control Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable - AM/FM
NOTE: View shown from behind instrument panel for clarity.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna.
3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers.
Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 5853
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Removal and Installation
NOTE: This procedure applies to the vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, a
new satellite radio antenna must be laid over the harness and secured.
1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the RH sun visor.
3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical
connector.
4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
5. Remove the satellite radio antenna.
- Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable-to-Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS)
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 5854
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening cover.
2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud.
3. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be
programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) again.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Page 5862
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5867
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5868
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Code
NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed
codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad.
3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing the Personal Codes
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code
will work.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5869
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no
more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 5874
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 5875
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
2 times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 5876
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions.
1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position.
4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that
programming mode is entered.
6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds.
Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock
control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the
perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled.
7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 5877
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5887
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5888
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5889
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5890
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5891
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5892
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5893
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5894
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5895
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5900
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5901
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5902
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5903
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5904
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5905
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5906
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5907
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5908
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5909
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 09-13-5 > Jul >
09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5910
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5916
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5917
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5918
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5919
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5920
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5921
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5922
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5923
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 5924
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Cellular Phone Microphone: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5929
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5930
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5931
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5932
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5933
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5934
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5935
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5936
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5937
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5938
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 5939
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 5952
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 5953
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 5958
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 5959
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 5969
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 5970
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 5975
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R)
System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 5976
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 5982
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 5987
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 5993
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: >
10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 5998
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 6001
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 6004
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 6005
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 6006
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 6007
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6010
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6011
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6012
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6013
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6014
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6015
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6016
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6021
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6022
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6028
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6029
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6032
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6033
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6034
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6035
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6039
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6040
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6047
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6051
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 6054
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
> Page 6063
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
> Page 6064
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6069
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6070
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6071
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6072
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6073
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6074
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6075
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6076
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6077
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6078
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
> Page 6079
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6085
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6086
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6091
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6092
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6093
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6094
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6095
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6096
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6097
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6098
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6099
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6100
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality > Page 6101
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade > Page 6106
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade > Page 6107
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 6113
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 6118
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Sync Software Programming
TSB 08-21-2
10/27/08
SYNC SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2009 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator 2009 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE The Sync Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) may require updates to add system
enhancements, improve system reliability or address consumer issues. The installation or
availability of these updates may be made available in two different methods:
^ Downloadable consumer Service Pack updates available through www.SYNCmyride.com
website.
^ APIM Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
The tool and installation requirements vary between these two methods. This information is being
provided to supplement current publications, clarify the requirements needed to reprogram or
update the APIM module and provide some additional diagnostic/operational system information.
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips for details.
SERVICE TIPS
Downloadable Consumer Service Pack Updates (Available At www.SyncMyRide.com)
These Service Pack Updates are for the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) side of the APIM
module only and are customized for each vehicle based on the last reported APIM software level
state. The software download process will bundle the appropriate service packs that are required to
achieve the desired state. This is why consumers are asked to report back to the website once they
have completed the install.
NOTE
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO REUSE A DOWNLOADED SERVICE PACK ACROSS
MULTIPLE VEHICLES. EACH DOWNLOAD IS PACKAGED ACCORDINGLY TO THE CURRENT
STATE OF THE VEHICLE THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS INTENDED FOR.
NOTE
CONSUMERS DO NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO REMOVE SERVICE PACK UPDATES ONCE
THEY ARE INSTALLED.
Steps For Consumer's To Update Sync With The Latest Enhancements
1. Prepare universal serial bus (USB) storage drive by:
a. Log into their Sync account and select applications and updates to download.
b. Locates a portable USB storage drive that they can take to their vehicle.
NOTE
FOR OWNERS OF MULTIPLE SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLES, IT IS STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED TO USE A SEPARATE USB DRIVE FOR EACH SYNC-EQUIPPED VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6123
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6124
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6125
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6126
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6127
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 6133
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine
Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 > Page 6138
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6143
Dedicating a USB drive to each vehicle's Sync system helps keep each vehicle's download and
installation history current and accurate. In addition, as new Sync features and functionalities
become available, consumers may decide to install different features on different vehicles.
Dedicated USB drives will help maintain the unique applications for each vehicle.
2. Download files by:
a. Plug the USB drive into the computer's USB port.
b. Select the USB port being used on the computer.
c. Confirm choice of USB storage drive. Then click Next.
d. After clicking Next, the files will automatically begin downloading.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE UNTIL THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE. THE SCREEN
WILL CONFIRM THAT THE DOWNLOAD IS COMPLETE.
e. Safely remove the USB storage drive from the computer's USB port by clicking on the Windows
personal computer (PC) Safely Remove Hardware icon at the bottom right of the screen, next to
the clock.
3. Install files by:
a. Insert USB storage drive into the vehicle's Sync USB port.
b. Turn on both, the vehicle and radio.
NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO HAVE THE VEHICLE RUNNING (WITH PROPER EXHAUST
VENTILATION) AND NOT IN THE ACCESSORY MODE. THIS IS TO ENSURE THE VEHICLE'S
BATTERY SUPPLY VOLTAGE REMAINS STABLE DURING THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS.
c. Select User Device.
d. Select Settings.
e. Select Install. Display will change to Begin Installation?
f. Select Yes. Installing file - will display on the screen.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE THE USB DRIVE WHILE THE INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS.
g. Upon completion of downloading of files, Installation Complete will display on the Sync screen.
h. The Sync voice will say, Installation complete. Sync may also say, The system will now reboot.
Please wait a few moments before using the system. Installation Complete will remain on the Sync
display until you exit the installation mode.
i. Select the Menu radio button to exit installation mode.
j. Remove the USB storage drive.
k. Consumer takes their USB storage drive back to their computer to report the successful install.
(This feature allows for tracking and determining if the consumers vehicle has a newer version
available for downloading or not.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DETAILS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM
WEBSITE. REGISTERED SYNC OWNERS WILL SEE VEHICLE SPECIFIC DETAILS AND
DIRECTIONS BASED ON THEIR VEHICLE'S OPTION CONTENT.
APIM Programming Using IDS
This method programs both, the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) (through the data link connector)
and CIP (through the USB port), portions of the APIM module.
NOTE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6144
SOFTWARE PACKAGES OBTAINED THROUGH THE PROFESSIONAL TECHNICIAN SOCIETY
(PTS) WEBSITE CONTAINS BOTH, VIP AND CIP FILES, THESE DO NOT NEED TO BE
INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE LIKE THE CONSUMER DOWNLOAD SERVICE PACK UPDATES,
BUT THE ENTIRE PACKAGE MUST BE INSTALLED DURING REPROGRAMMING FOR
PROPER OPERATION. THESE SOFTWARE PACKAGES ARE MUCH LARGER IN SIZE AND
CONTAIN ALL THE PREVIOUS LEVELS OF ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES AS WELL AS
ANY ADDITIONAL ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES FOR BOTH THE VIP AND CIP
PROCESSORS LOCATED IN THE APIM MODULE.
NOTE
YOU WILL NOT HAVE THE ABILITY TO RESTORE THE PREVIOUS LEVEL OF SYNC
OPERATING SOFTWARE ONCE THE APIM MODULE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY UPDATED
TO THE NEXT HIGHER LEVEL.
NOTE
If a new APIM is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure.
For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00.
It is recommended to install a battery charger to the vehicles battery and set at the low charge
setting and insure the PC being used for reprogramming is fully charged or plugged into a power
source prior to starting the reprogramming process.
1. Turn the ignition key to the On position.
2. Turn the audio control module (ACM) on.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Connect one end of the USB male-A to male-A cable Rotunda part number
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 (1-800-Rotunda option 6) or equivalent to the scan tool. Compatible cables.
(Figures 1) Non-compatible cables. (Figure 2)
5. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
6. From the technician service publication website, run OASIS using Quick Start or by manually
entering the vehicle identification number (VIN).
7. From the OASIS tab, select the Sync/APIM bullet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6145
8. Select the Read APIM button to verify the current APIM VIP and CIP software levels.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VEHICLE COMMUNICATION MODULE (VCM) OR USB CABLES
DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
9. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select
the Program APIM button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted.
a. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to
program the VIP.
b. When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
10. The Sync/APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays Programming
has been completed successfully.
11. Test the audio system for correct operation. PC requirements for successful reprogramming an
APIM module.
Ford And LIM Logon Issues - Including Proper Browser Settings
The following list will have you check various computer settings to insure your PC is set to the
proper configuration for reprogramming an APIM module.
NOTE
CHANGES TO PC SETTINGS MAY REQUIRE
ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS.
1. Do not use a customized browser like AOL, it will not work. Please use Internet Explorer (IE)
version 5.5 5P2, 6.0, or higher.
2. Log into website.
3. Navigate to PTS (Professional Technician Society) under the Technical Tools on the Parts and
Service tab.
4. Check IE settings by completing the following:
a. Preliminary Checks.
NOTE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO WINDOWS XP MACHINES WITH 5P2 AND IE 6.0 AND
ABOVE.
(1) Open IE, select Tools at the top of the screen and select Security.
(2) Click on the Internet Zone, and find Navigate Sub-frames across different domains and enable
this function.
(3) Then click OK, system may ask you if you want to accept these function please select Yes.
(4) Check the Windows Firewall to make sure it is turned off by:
(a) Selecting the Start button.
(b) Select Control Panel.
(c) Select Windows Firewall (if you do not see the icon, make sure you are using Classic View) and
set to off.
(5) Check Windows Pop-up Blocker to make sure it is turned off.
(a) Open IE.
(b) Select Tools at the top of the screen.
(c) Select Pop-up Blocker and turn it off.
(6) Remove any add-on toolbars such as Google or Yahoo toolbars, as these have additional built
in pop-up blockers.
(7) Verify that any third party anti-virus, anti-spyware, firewall, or internet security software is
temporarily disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6146
b. Browser Settings - Open IE and select Internet Options under the Tools heading.
(1) Select the General tab
(2) Select Delete Files and check the Delete all offline content and select OK
(3) Select Delete Cookies and click OK
(4) Select Clear History and select Yes.
(5) Click on the Security tab.
(6) Click on the Trusted Sites icon.
(7) Click on Sites.
(8) In the box below add this website to the zone type in - website.
(9) Ensure that required server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone is not checked.
(10) Click the Add button.
(11) Click the Close button.
(12) Re-select the Security tab and select Custom Level.
(13) Under Reset Custom Settings, pull down and Reset to: Low, select Reset, select Yes and then
OK.
NOTE
IF RUNNING OASIS ON IE 7.0, RESET TO: MEDIUM-LOW. ALSO, UNDER SETTINGS, SCROLL
TO NAVIGATE SUB-FRAMES ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS, SET TO ENABLED AND CLICK
OK.
(14) Select the Privacy tab, and move the slider to Low.
(15) Click on the Advanced, check the box Override automatic cookie handling and check the box
to Always allow session cookies' and
click OK.
(16) Select the Advanced tab and scroll down to HTP 1.1 settings; make sure both options under
this section are checked.
(17) Scroll down to Security section and make sure the following are checked:
(a) Empty Temporary Internet folder when browser is closed.
(b) Use SSL 2.0.
(c) Use SSL 3.0.
(d) Use TLS 1.0.
(e) Select Apply and then click on OK.
5. Close all browsers and reboot the computer to have the browser settings take affect properly.
The browser settings have now been setup correctly as per Ford Browser settings
recommendations.
Additional PC Security Settings (May Or May Not Be Required - Depends On Operating System)
Changes to PC Security Settings may require Administrator access.
1. Check for Information Bar near top of IE page stating - This website wants to run the following
add-ons.
2. Click on Information Bar and select Run ActiveX Controls or Temporarily Allow Pop-ups
depending on your operating system.
3. Click on Retry button to refresh information. (May not be required on some operating systems)
PC and Server Troubleshooting (Optional)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-21-2 > Oct > 08 >
Computers/Controls - Sync Software Programming > Page 6147
^ If you wish to test another browser for web-based training only, download the free version of
Opera at www.Opera.com.
^ For web-based training sound problems, make sure your firewall allows downloading sound file
types such as MP3.
^ If you have installed special search and add-on programs such as Gator or Bonzi please remove
them.
^ If you have a router, make sure that port 443 is open for Secure Socket Layer (SSL), and ports
80 and 8080 are open for HTTP.
^ Internet access uses a caching or proxy server. Make sure the caching/proxy servers are set to
automatically detect settings. Contact your local network administrator and/or your Internet service
provider and have them turn off the caching on any and all caching proxy servers for the following:
^ Uniform Resource Locator (URL): www.proservicetech.com or ford website
Additional Sync Related Service Tips
1. Performing a Master Reset of the APIM module or removing and restoring the Keep Alive Power
circuit fuse (refer to the appropriate wiring manual) for 3-minutes, prior to reprogramming will
restore the factory APIM defaults. This can reduce the possibilities of corrupt files, that may have
been transferred into the APIM modules memory, from interfering with the reprogramming of the
CIP portion of the APIM module.
2. Non-factory installed items that can cause background noise, wind noise or obstruct the voice
path to the Sync system's microphone, will reduce the reliability or accuracy of the consumer's
voice commands or speech being recognized properly. Some examples may include but are not
limited to:
^ Objects hanging from the rear view mirror that may make noise or obstruct the system
microphone located on the mirror.
^ Bug shields.
^ Roof mounted accessories.
^ Damaged window moldings.
^ Non-factory installed overhead consoles or sun-visor storage compartments that obstruct the
voice path to the systems microphone. (It is recommended when diagnosing voice recognition or
phone call sound quality issues to eliminate these types of items before replacing any system
components)
3. Remote Starts may prevent the Automatic Discovery Process, of previously paired phones, from
connecting with the consumer's phone as it may be outside of the device's Bluetooth reception
range. Once the vehicle is started remotely, the Sync system automatically begins to search for
previously paired phones; eventually this process will time out if the customers phone does not
enter the vehicle prior to the expiration of this internal timer, resulting in the vehicle Sync not
automatically recognize the phone and pair with it. If this occurs, once the customer enters the
vehicle, the consumer will be required to manually connect the phone through the Sync menus if
they would like to use the hands free phone features.
NOTE
THE CONSUMER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PAIR THE PHONE AGAIN.
4. When Reprogramming APIM modules, it is strongly recommended to use a hard wired internet
connection if possible, due to the APIM program file sizes. If a wired internet connection is not
available, it is recommended to access the PTS website and download the latest Sync software
files from the Tech Central tab prior to reprogramming. This will reduce the overall reprogramming
time when you are connected to the vehicle. If error messages appear during the reprogramming
process that indicate errors with the VIP or CIP file/image, comparing the saved file/image by
checking the file size, between your PC/IDS with the available file/image size indicated in the PTS
description can help determine if the file may be corrupt or damaged. If this has occurred or is
suspected, re-download the file/image and select Yes when asked Do you want to replace it?
5. Always diagnose and repair any DTC's for the Audio system or any module communication
related faults prior to APIM reprogramming.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6152
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair
Audio Input Jack
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips.
Remove the instrument panel lower panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Entertainment System Control
Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Entertainment System
Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) is
being installed.
Upload the FDIM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back.
3. Remove the 4 FDIM screws.
4. Remove the FDIM.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the FDIM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 6170
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an
assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center
instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be
replaced.
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6180
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module:
> 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6181
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6187
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning
System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6188
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns > Page 6198
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update
For Various Concerns > Page 6199
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6205
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6206
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6212
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6218
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 6224
Amplifier: Diagrams Audio Amplifier
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier
Amplifier: Service and Repair Subwoofer Amplifier
Subwoofer Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 6227
Amplifier: Service and Repair Audio Amplifier
Audio Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the audio amplifier electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the audio amplifier.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6231
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6232
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module
Removal and Installation
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles without navigation only. For vehicle with navigation, the
satellite radio receiver is built-in to the Audio Control Module (ACM).
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System
(SDARS) module is being installed.
Upload the SDARS module configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Disconnect the SDARS module antenna cable and electrical connectors.
3. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the SDARS module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the SDARS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control,
Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair
Remote Control: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Controls
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control,
Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6236
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 6241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 6242
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 6243
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker
Door Speaker
NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the door trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 6246
Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker
Subwoofer Speaker
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete
assembly.
1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel.
2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 6264
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns >
Page 6265
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page
6270
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page
6271
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 6281
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 6282
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6287
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6288
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 6291
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 6294
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 6295
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 6296
Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 6297
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6300
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6301
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) module Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
displays on the screen.
3. Record the SDARS module ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Navigation Audio System
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6302
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6303
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
All Except Navigation
Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6304
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool.
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. If equipped, remove the 4 screws and the ACM side support brackets.
6. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
7. Remove the ACM.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is being
installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6305
2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6306
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's
Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6315
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set > Page 6316
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6321
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6322
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6323
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6324
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6325
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6326
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6327
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6328
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6329
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6330
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page 6331
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Functions
Inoperative/DTC's Set
TSB 09-14-3
07/27/09
SYNC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE, DTC U3000-41, U0485, OR U0100, AND/OR BATTERY
DRAW WITH ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE CONNECTED
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2010 Fusion 2010 Mustang 2008-2009 Edge,
Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 Zephyr 2008-2010 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan 2008-2009 Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid,
Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 vehicles equipped with SYNC version 2 software level, SYNC 911 Assist
and Vehicle Health Report, may exhibit all or most of the following symptoms:
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) U3000-41, U0485, or U0100 in Accessory Protocol Interface
Module (APIM)
^ SYNC display menus/options blank
^ USB port inoperative
^ No SYNC Blue Tooth device connectivity
^ Voice/Phone/OK steering wheel controls inoperative
^ Lack of APIM communication
^ Parasitic battery draw with APIM connected
These symptoms may be triggered by a low battery state of charge, or a recent battery
disconnect/reconnect.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade only applies to the following Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Customer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels:
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AC / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BC
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AD / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
^ VIP: 9L2T-14D205-AE / CIP: 9L2T-14D544-BD
To determine the current APIM software level, reference the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set >
Page 6337
button and select the SYNC button.
1. Determine if communication can be established with the APIM using IDS.
a. If communication cannot be verified, proceed to Step 2.
b. If communication is present, proceed to Step 3.
2. Reference Workshop Manual, Section 418-00, Module Communication Network to determine if
communication can be established. If not, perform
an APIM power reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery.
a. If communication is now present, proceed to Step 3.
b. If communication still cannot be established, replace the APIM.
3. Reprogram the APIM to VIP software level 9L2T-14D205-AF by following the Service Procedure.
NOTE
SOFTWARE IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE PTS WEBSITE, AND NOT AVAILABLE
THROUGH THE SYNCMYRIDE.COM WEBSITE.
NOTE
CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRES THE USE OF A SPECIAL PTS
APPLICATION. INSTALLER MUST HAVE ACCESS TO PTS AND HAVE A VALID PTS USER ID
AND PASSWORD.
a. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
b. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
c. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
d. Launch IDS tool.
e. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
f. Close the IDS tool.
g. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN And DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO
button.
h. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
i. Press read APIM button.
j. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT USE A TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
k. Program the processor in the APIM.
l. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMU5B2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software, and to the vehicle USB port.
m. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the VIP module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-14-3 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Functions Inoperative/DTC's Set >
Page 6338
n. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
o. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091403 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone
Sound Quality
TSB 09-13-5
07/13/09
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2009 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call, and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The following service procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Do not perform Step 1 if vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 2.0 (911 and Vehicle Health
Report) or has been upgraded to consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE. To
determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS)
website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button, and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-14D544-AE. For additional information Refer to
other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01.
Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement, and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, Refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6343
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible
wire.
2008-2009 Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C210.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 Escape / Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6344
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped), or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD182 (BK-GY) from C214.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD1 82 (BK-GY).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Navigator / 2009 Expedition
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6345
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped), or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not
equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07 (GY), RMN07 (VT), and DMN07 (shield - BK) from C298. Cut the three
circuits on the male side of the connector
(17C712 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP31 (BU-OG) and GD133 (BK) from C298 (2008 Navigator only). Identify
circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C298
(2009 Expedition/Navigator only).
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP31 (BU-OG) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK)
for 2008 Navigator only. Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness
wire to GD133 (BK) for 2009 Expedition/Navigator only.
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6346
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2008-2009 Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner run
microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify and cut circuits VMNO7 (GY), RMNO7 (VT), and DMNO7 (shield) from C248. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP05 (YE) and GD143 (BK-VT) from C248.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP05 (YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD143 (BK-VT).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN07 (GY) and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMN07
(VT) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2009 F-150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6347
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124-1 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14358 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) from C315 and GD133 (BK) from C314.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the headliner.
2009 F-Super Duty
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6348
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield - BK) from C264. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C264.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield - BK).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Connect the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6349
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Focus
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6350
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figure 10). Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the dome lamp trim.
2. Lower the dome lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install dome lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the dome lamp trim directly behind
microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CPL60 (BN-YE) and GD161 (BK-YE) from C934.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CPL60 (BN-YE) and any black jumper harness wire to GD161
(BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Fusion / Milan / MKZ
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6351
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13 (YE-GN), RMM13 (BU), and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three
circuits on the female side of the connector
(14334 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP02 (GN) and GD139 (BK-YE) from C913.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP02 (GN) and any black jumper harness wire to GD139 (BK-YE).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 (YE-GN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMM13 (BU) and DMM13 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2008-2009 Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6352
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124-1 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the
three circuits on the female side of the connector
(17K745 harness).
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C925.
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the
other cut wire ends as they are no longer used.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
2009 MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner, and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124-1 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO2 (WH-BN), RMN02 (VT-BN), and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back
the black harness sleeve and cut the three
circuits near C91 1 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2
access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM, Section 417-01 for additional
information.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 (BU) and GD133 (BK) from C911.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-13-5 > Jul > 09 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Sound Quality > Page
6353
8. Splice the five jumper harness wires into the following circuits:
^ Blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 (BU) and any black jumper harness wire to GD133 (BK).
^ Ensure original circuits remain connected in splice.
^ Yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 (WH-BN) and remaining black jumper harness wires to
RMN02 (VT-BN) and DMN07 (shield).
^ Only splice into the wires heading away from the connector. The wires heading into the connector
(mirror) are no longer used.
^ Ensure the wiring is neatly routed from the splice locations into the headliner, following the
existing wire harness routing from mirror to headliner.
9. Attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector.
10. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable above the front of the headliner.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-2
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT091305 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 6358
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 6359
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR
Software Upgrade
TSB 09-11-8
06/15/09
SYNC WITH 911 ASSIST AND VEHICLE HEALTH REPORT (VHR) DEALER UPGRADE
SOFTWARE
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape Hybrid, Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-5-4 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some customers with 2008 or 2009 vehicles equipped with SYNC may request the 911
assist and vehicle health report (VHR) service upgrade installation. This software upgrade is not a
warrantable repair. Software is available only through professional technician society (PTS)
website, and not available through the syncmyride.com website.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to upgrade the SYNC software.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This software upgrade applies only to the following vehicle model years and build dates:
^ 2008-2009 Focus built before 1/20/2009
^ 2008-2009 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer built before 1/12/2009
^ 2008-2009 Edge, MKX, and 2009 Flex, Escape, Mariner built before 12/4/2008
^ 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, and 2009 F-Super Duty, MKS, F-150 built before 12/1/2008
^ 2008-2009 Fusion, Milan, MKZ
Vehicles built on or after these dates are already equipped with the 911 Assist/Vehicle Health
Report features and do not require updating.
To determine if the vehicles are within these build ranges or have already been upgraded to SYNC
911 Assist/VHR, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, run OASIS by
pressing the Read VIN and DTC's button, and click on the SYNC tab. If the description box
indicates 911 and Vehicle Health Report, vehicle has been upgraded.
The 911 assist with VHR upgrade automatically reprograms the accessory protocol interface
module (APIM), instrument cluster (IC), and restraints control module (RCM).
The VHR applies only to United States (US) vehicles, 911 assist is for US and Canadian vehicles
operated within the US and Canada.
Performing this upgrade may result in some untested devices losing certain functionality, such as
bluetooth connection and phonebook download. Before continuing with this upgrade, make sure
the customer's device is listed on the compatibility matrix. It is strongly recommended to pair the
device to another vehicle currently equipped with 911 Assist/Vehicle Health Report to ensure
proper functionality before continuing.
Configuration and programming requires the use of IDS and a special PTS application. Installer
must have access to PTS and have a valid PTS user ID and password. Ensure the IDS is at the
latest software version.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 6365
For additional programming tips, dealer network setting requirements, and possible error states
related to 911 Assist and VHR upgrades, reference the latest information on the Professional
Technician Society (PTS) website.
1. When updating 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Expedition, or Navigator
vehicles, it is necessary to manually record and
reenter the Oil Life % Value as displayed on the message center. Record the current oil life before
updating 911 Assist/VHR, and reenter using the message center once programming is complete.
2. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Connect the VCM to the IDS tool or laptop running IDS software.
4. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
5. Launch IDS tool but do not start a new session.
6. If required, update the VCM with the latest IDS release 59.9 and higher.
7. Close the IDS tool.
8. From the P15 website, run OASIS by pressing the read VIN and DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the go button.
9. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, select the Upgrade/Mods tab.
10. Once correct vehicle is chosen, select SYNC upgrade with 911 Assist/VHR.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the APIM, IC, and RCM.
NOTE
TO COMPLETE THE UPGRADE PROCESS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO CONFIRM
THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN CORRECTLY CONFIGURED TO HAVE THESE FEATURES. FAILING
TO COMPLETE THE STEPS BELOW MAY RESULT IN 911 ASSIST/VHR NOT DISPLAYING ON
THE SYNC MENU.
12. Set ignition to off.
13. Open and close driver side door.
14. Set ignition to on.
15. Follow applicable instructions (see below) to ensure 911 Assist/VHR appear on Sync menu.
16. Close all Internet Explorer browser windows.
17. Clear all DTC's on all modules.
18. Reenter the Oil Life % Value for 2008-2009 Explorer, Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac,
Expedition, or Navigator vehicles.
Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on the Navigation LCD to enter phone menu.
2. Press cancel when pop-up menu appears on Navigation LCD display.
3. Press settings soft key on Navigation LCD display.
4. Press advanced soft key on Navigation LCD display.
5. Verify 911 Assist/VHR is in menu in Navigation LCD display.
Non Navigation Radio Instructions
911 Assist/VHR feature confirmation.
1. Press phone button on steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-11-8 > Jun > 09 > SYNC(R) System - 911 Assist VHR Software Upgrade >
Page 6366
2. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
3. Press left arrow on steering wheel until return is displayed on radio screen, then press ok.
4. Press left arrow until 911 Assist/VHR is displayed.
Once 911 Assist/VHR installation is complete, the customer will need to reload their phone book if
that application is desired.
NOTE
IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED ON 2008 OR 2009 EARLY BUILT VEHICLES UPGRADED TO 911
ASSIST/VHR, REFERENCE THE APPLICABLE 2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
V2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only - Not Warrantable
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD
Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Entertainment System Control Module: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation Radio - Time Displays Twice
In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns > Page 6388
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various
Concerns > Page 6389
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software
Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 6395
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns > Page 6396
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation
Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation
Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6405
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation
Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6406
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Software Update For
Various Concerns
TSB 09-26-8
01/04/10
SYNC SOFTWARE UPDATE - VARIOUS ISSUES
FORD: 2008-2009 Focus, Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus, Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009
Escape, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2008-2009 MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable, Mountaineer 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-22-14 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 and 2009 SYNC® equipped vehicles may exhibit one or more of the following
symptoms:
^ Universal Serial Bus (USB) port inoperative.
^ USB audio muting when using various non-Apple USB devices.
^ Phone book access difficulty on certain 2-digit phone book entries when using voice commands.
^ Excessive background noise and/or poor voice sound quality.
^ Phone book auto download inoperative on supported devices.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative intermittently.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Reprogram the accessory protocol inter[ace module (APIM) to the following consumer inter[ace
processor (CIP) software levels.
^ 9L3T-14D544-AE (vehicles not equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health Report)
^ 9L2T-14D544-BE (vehicles already equipped with SYNC V2, 911 Assist and Vehicle Health
Report)
Service Pack files may be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
Reprogram the APIM
Contains software fix updates for the following:
^ Phone book auto download inoperative.
^ USB audio muting.
^ SYNC steering wheel control (SWC) switches being inoperative.
^ Voice recognition on 2-digit entries.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6412
^ USB port inoperative with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1342.
^ Poor call sound quality.
This software update also contains enhancements that will improve the reliability of both Bluetooth
and USB connections to SYNC(R) from various consumer devices, and microphone enhancements
to reduce background noise, and will default Vehicle Health Report (if equipped) to off. The
Bluetooth enhancements improve the stability of hands-free calls, call waiting, caller ID, multiple
call handling and other mobile phone features. The USB enhancements improve support for media
players and the playing of file formats and podcasts.
NOTE
REFERENCE OTHER TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSB) FOR ADDITIONAL SYNC
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING TIPS.
1. Connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Connect the VCM to the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) tool or laptop running IDS software.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
4. Launch IDS tool.
5. If required, update the VCM with the latest software.
6. Close the IDS tool.
7. From the PTS website, run OASIS by pressing the Read VIN & DTC's button. After vehicle
communication is established, press the GO button.
8. From the Vehicle Service Session screen, Select the SYNC button.
9. Press read APIM button.
10. Select software and press program APIM to update the SYNC module.
NOTE
YOU MUST USE A MALE-A TO MALE-A USB CABLE LIKE ROTUNDA PART NUMBER
CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10 TO COMPLETE THIS STEP.
NOTE
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE VCM OR USB CABLES DURING APIM PROGRAMMING.
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY PROMPT YOU TO INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR THE USB PORT. FOLLOW
THE ON SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS TO INSTALL THE USB PORT DRIVER ALREADY
INCLUDED IN WINDOWS XP.
11. Program both processors in the APIM (Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and CIP).
NOTE
DO NOT USE A MALE-TO-MALE USB DATA TRANSFER TYPE CABLE.
a. Connect the Male-A to Male-A USB cable, Rotunda part number CCMUSB2-AM-AM-10, to the
IDS tool or laptop running IDS software and
to the vehicle USB port.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to program both processors on the Sync module (VIP and
CIP).
12. At the end of the configuration and programming procedure, the programming has been
completed successfully screen will be displayed.
13. Exit PTS, disconnect the VCM and disconnect the USB cable.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 08-21-02
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092608A 2008-2009 Edge, Explorer, 0.4 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09-26-8 > Jan > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Software Update For Various Concerns > Page 6413
Mountaineer, Explorer Sport Trac, Focus, Fusion, Milan, MKX, MKZ, Sable, Navigator, Taurus,
Taurus X, 2009 Expedition, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Flex, MKS: Reprogram The APIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14D212 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6417
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6418
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6424
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6425
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6426
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6429
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6430
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6431
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6432
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6437
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6441
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 6447
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6452
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6453
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all
of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6454
grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN
LAMP
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN)
FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6455
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6456
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6457
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6458
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6459
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay.
- Is the trailer tow relay OK?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6460
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Description and Operation
Body Control Systems: Description and Operation
Module Controlled Functions
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled
by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the
approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal
10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to
Windows.
The SJB is the only multifunction electronic module on this vehicle. The SJB is a combination of a
multifunction electronic module and a Central Junction Box (CJB). The following systems are
controlled by the SJB:
- Auto locks
- Exterior lamps
- Illuminated entry and interior lamps
- Keyless entry keypad
- Power door locks
- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The SJB is located under the front (passenger side floor) console.
Post Crash Alert
The post crash alert function is controlled by the SJB. If the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
determines an impact of severity enough to deploy the air bags has occurred (the air bags may or
may not be deployed by the RCM), the RCM sends a message to the Instrument Cluster (IC) over
the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN), which sends a message to the SJB over the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) and the SJB activates the post crash alert
function by sounding the horn 3 times, then off for 4 seconds, then on 3 times, etc., until the battery
dies or the function is turned off. The hazard lamps also flash with the horn sounding, however, the
hazard lamps keep flashing during the horn off cycle.
The post crash alert function can be turned off by:
- pressing the hazard switch (may need to be pressed more than once).
- pressing the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key UNLOCK button.
- pressing the PANIC button.
This feature acts similar to the perimeter alarm, but the horn cycle is different. Turning the ignition
to the ON position will not deactivate this function, but will deactivate an activated perimeter alarm.
The post crash alert function cannot be configured off.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Body Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection And Verification
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test:
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Principles Of Operation
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled
by the SJB) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6467
km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the
time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's
Literature. For the accessory delay relay, refer to Windows.
The SJB is a multifunction electronic module that controls many of the vehicle systems. Several
SJB functions utilize hardwired inputs and/or outputs. The SJB controls the following hardwired
functions, using the corresponding inputs and outputs:
In addition, the SJB is involved in other vehicle systems through communication over the Controller
Area Network (CAN). For a detailed list of the SJB network inputs and outputs, refer to Information
Bus.
Some SJB parameters are programmable. Two types of programmable parameters are available:
vehicle configuration and customer preference. Refer to Information Bus for programmable
parameters.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs
(for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive
current (typically shorted circuits) and are shut down (turn off the voltage or ground provided by the
module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the time for the fault.
The circuit resets after a customer demand (ignition cycle) of the function (which switches the
component on, causing the 30-minute battery saver timer to be energized). When an excessive
circuit load (from a shorted circuit) occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored by the first
failure does not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs.
The SJB does not allow the DTC to be cleared or the normal circuit function restored until a
successful self-test (retrieving on-demand DTCs) proves that the fault has been repaired. After the
self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC clear and
the normal circuit function returns.
The SJB has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established. When the first or second
level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the short circuit sets along with DTC B106E.
These DTCs (B106E and the DTC associated with the shorted circuit) may be cleared using the
Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. Each and every
time the scan tool retrieves DTCs from the module and a circuit is shorted, a level of short circuit
tolerance is used up.
If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level (if DTCs have been retrieved 3 successive
times with the short circuit not having been repaired), then DTCs B106F and B1342 are set along
with the associated continuous DTC. These DTCs (B106F and B1342) cannot be cleared and the
module must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6468
The initial short circuit must be successfully repaired and its associated DTC is cleared before the
SJB is replaced or the new SJB may experience one or more of the short circuit tolerance levels
being used up, causing a repeat replacement of the module.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the handles, locks, latches and entry systems are the
liftgate lock actuator circuit CPL10 (GN/WH) and the keypad illumination circuit CPK28 (WH/GN).
DTC B106E sets when the SJB has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit
overload. A corresponding DTC for the circuit in question will also be set as follows:
- DTC B1034 - Radio Start Signal Circuit Failure
- DTC B1218 - Horn Relay Coil Circuit Short to Vbatt
- DTC B1304 - Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1316 - Battery Saver Relay Coil Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1349 - Heated Backlite Relay Short To Battery
- DTC B1474 - Battery Saver Power Relay Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1502 - Lamp Turn Signal Left Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1506 - Lamp Turn Signal Right Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1626 - Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit To Ground
- DTC B2070 - Trailer Tow Relay Coil(s) Circuit Failure
- DTC B2501 - LF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2503 - RF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2505 - LF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2507 - RF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2512 - Front Fog Lamp Relay Ckt Short to Battery
- DTC C1788 - Stoplamp Relay Output Circuit Short to Ground
- DTC C1961 - Park Lamp Relay Coil Circuit Failure
- DTC P0930 - Gear Shift Lock Solenoid Circuit Low
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6469
Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
NOTE: Most powertrain (P-code) DTCs are diagnosed in Computers and Control Systems
Information. If the P-code retrieved is not listed below, refer to Computers and Control Systems
Information to continue diagnostics.
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: Some of these modules utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type
code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or
shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix
to assist in determining DTC history.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6470
B0001:1A-B0011:13
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6471
B0011:2B-B0029:13
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6472
B0029:2B-B0092:11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6473
B00A0:4A-B0097:96
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6474
B00B5:11-B1155
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6475
B11BA:1C-B1214:12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6476
B12A0-B1299
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6477
B12AB-B1318
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6478
B1318-B1520
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6479
B1A01:01-B2032
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6480
B2044-B2427
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6481
B273A-B2870
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6482
B2A20-B2965
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6483
B2A2A-B2A4D / C0001:49-C0018:49
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6484
C001C:49-C0034:29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6485
C003A:01-C0063:64
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6486
C0064:28-C1018:62
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6487
C101A:62-C1133:64
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6488
C1134:28-C1699
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6489
C1B00:28-C2780 / P0512-P0563
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6490
P0A0A-P0727
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6491
P0AA6-P2613
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6492
PXXXX-P2806 / U0001-U0131
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6493
U0131:87-U0155:00
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6494
U0155:00-U0256:00
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6495
U0256:00-U2014:41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6496
U201A:51-U2100:56
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6497
U261A-U3003:17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6498
U3003:17
Smart Junction Box (SJB) DTC Chart
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
DTC Charts
B106E-B1342 / P062F / U0155-U2473
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6499
Body Control Systems: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6500
Body Control Systems: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: DTCs B106E/B106F
Normal Operation
When a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload is detected on certain output circuits, the Smart
Junction Box (SJB) disables the circuit by removing voltage, or ground, to the affected circuit. The
circuit remains disabled until the fault is corrected and an on-demand self-test is run. When the
on-demand self-test has been run after all faults have been corrected, any DTCs related to the fault
are cleared.
- DTC B106E (Solid State Driver Disabled Due to Short Circuit) - sets when the SJB has disabled a
circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. For a complete list of corresponding
DTCs, refer to the Principles of Operation. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Principles Of Operation
- DTC B106F (Module Disabled Due to External Fault) - sets when one or more output functions
are permanently disabled due to a repetitive circuit overload fault. When DTC B106F is present
(DTC B1342 may also be present), the SJB must be replaced after the fault condition has been
corrected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Output circuit short to ground or voltage
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: DTCs B106E/B106F
NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present and the Smart Junction Box (SJB) is to be replaced, the fault
condition must be corrected first. Failure to correct the fault condition first may cause damage to
the new SJB, resulting in a repeat repair.
NOTICE: If DTC B106F is present, DTC B1342 may also be present. At this time, ignore these
DTCs and follow the necessary diagnostics to resolve DTC B106E and any other DTCs that are
present. DTC B106E will be present only when there is another DTC due to a software issue or a
circuitry issue that must be resolved before another self-test is run. Each time a self-test is run, one
of the 3 thresholds is used. Once the 3 thresholds are used, DTCs B106F and B1342 will be
present and the SJB must be replaced. All other DTCs MUST be resolved first, or else the new
SJB will begin to have its 3 thresholds used with each self-test that is run.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK FOR DTC B106E
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B106E present?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK FOR OTHER DTCs
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
Are any SJB DTCs present other than DTC B106E?
Yes
CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. REPEAT the self-test
(on-demand DTCs).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6501
No
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK FOR DTC B106F
- Review the DTCs from the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B106F present?
Yes
CORRECT any other DTCs. REFER to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to
Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service
and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by a fault in one of the
output circuits.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above
or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1317 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB
detects high battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
- DTC B1317 (Battery Voltage High) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects battery voltage above 15.5 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Charging system concern
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: DTC B1317
NOTE: DTC B1317 may be stored in the module memory due to previous battery charging or
vehicle jump starting events.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK FOR DTC B1317, B1676 OR P0563 SET IN
OTHER MODULES
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: (All CMDTCs) Self-Test.
- Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from all modules.
Is DTC B1317, B1676 or P0563 (PCM) set in more than one module?
Yes
REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition.
No
GO to B2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6502
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
- Turn off all interior/exterior lights and accessories.
- Start and run the engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for 3 minutes while monitoring the battery
voltage.
- Does the battery voltage rise to 15.5 volts or higher?
Yes
REFER to Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condition.
No
GO to B3.
------------------------------------------------- B3 RECHECK FOR DTC B1317
- Turn the engine off.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the continuous memory DTCs.
- Carry out the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B1317 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during
battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the voltage from the battery to determine if it goes above
or below specific thresholds and sets DTC B1318 in continuous memory and on-demand if the SJB
detects low battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
- DTC B1318 (Battery Voltage Low) - a continuous memory or on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects battery voltage below 10 volts on circuit SBB02 (YE/RD).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- High circuit resistance
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST C: DTC B1318
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6503
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C1 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC B1318 still present?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during
battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs IN THE PCM
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: PCM Self-Test.
- Retrieve the continuous memory DTCs from the PCM.
- Is DTC P0620, P0625, P0626 or P065B set in the PCM?
Yes
REFER to Charging System.
No
GO to C3.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION AND STATE OF
CHARGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Check the battery condition and verify the battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery, Battery
Condition Test. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Is the battery OK and fully charged?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
REFER to Charging System.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE SJB VOLTAGE SUPPLY
- Measure and record the voltage at the battery.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280G.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the SJB C2280G-1, circuit SBB02 (YE/RD), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6504
- Is the voltage within 0.2 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280D.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280D-7, 24, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR the circuit for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Smart Junction Box (SJB) See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6505
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Pinpoint Test D: DTC U0155
Normal Operation
- DTC U0155 (Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IC) Control Module) - set by the
Smart Junction Box (SJB) if data messages received from the Instrument Cluster (IC) over the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) are missing for 5 minutes.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Module communication
- IC
PINPOINT TEST D: DTC U0155
------------------------------------------------- D1 VERIFY CUSTOMER CONCERN
- Ignition ON.
- Verify that there is an observable symptom present.
- Is an observable symptom present?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or intermittent fault condition.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test.
- Carry out the network test.
- Does the IC pass the network test?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
REFER to Information Bus.
------------------------------------------------- D3 RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE
SELF-TEST
- Check for recorded SJB DTCs from the self-test.
- Is DTC B1317 or B1318 recorded?
Yes
For DTC B1317, Go To Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: DTC B1317
For DTC B1318, Go To Pinpoint Test c. See: Pinpoint Test C: DTC B1318
No
GO to D4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6506
------------------------------------------------- D4 RECHECK THE SJB DTCs
NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be
incorrectly set during Programmable Module Installation (PMI) or the PMI may not have been
carried out.
- Clear the DTCs. Repeat the SJB self-test.
- Is DTC U0155 still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT the SJB self-test.
If DTC U0155 is still present, INSTALL a new SJB.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or intermittent fault condition.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
Running Board
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel.
3. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the body-to-running board bracket screw.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6516
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover
and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 6 pushpins from inside the front splash shield (3 each side).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center pushpins from the front bumper cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
7. If equipped, disconnect the front parking aid sensor harness.
8. Remove the 2 bolts that attach the grille to the radiator support bracket.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Position the front bumper cover.
- Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until the
bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6522
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws.
2. Remove the 2 rear splash shields.
- Remove the 4 splash shield pin-type retainers (2 each side).
- Remove the 4 splash shield screws (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear bumper cover.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6539
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6545
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6546
Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6547
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6548
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6549
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6550
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6551
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Front Door
Handle See: Exterior Front Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the actuating rods.
- If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle
reinforcement.
- Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
6554
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
6555
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior front door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle bezel and remove.
5. Remove the exterior front door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
6556
6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
6557
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
> Page 6562
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Front
Interior Door Handle - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Front
All alignments
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Front door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Remove the front fender.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
5. Remove the front door scuff plate.
6. Partially remove the front door weatherstrip.
7. Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
- Remove the pin-type retainer.
- Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
8. Remove the front door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside A-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6566
9. Position the weather shield aside and loosen, but do not remove, the front door lower hinge nut.
10. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
11. Adjust the door.
12. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Door Hinge - Upper, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front > Page 6569
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Lower, Front
Door Hinge - Lower, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
4. Pull outward to release the cowl trim panel clips and remove the cowl trim panel.
5. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6574
Front Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6575
Front Door Latch
Front Door Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Front
Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Front.
4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the front door latch.
- Slide the front door latch towards the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the front door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Front
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the door sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector.
2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
- Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6579
3. Remove the door handle screw.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
5. Remove the door pull cup screw.
6. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
7. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 6589
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 6590
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
> Page 6595
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 6601
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 6602
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 6607
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door > Page 6610
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 6618
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 6619
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6630
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6636
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6637
Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6638
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6639
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6640
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6641
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 6642
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Rear Door
Handle See: Exterior Rear Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch.
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
6645
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Rear Door Handle
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the rear window channel bolt and position the window channel aside.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
5. Remove the exterior rear door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior rear door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle bezel and remove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
6646
6. Remove the exterior rear door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
6647
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Interior Door Handle - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle
from the door trim panel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Rear
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
All alignments
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Rear door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
4. Remove the front door scuff plate.
5. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6654
6. Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel.
7. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside B-pillar.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
9. Adjust the door.
10. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
- To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (two clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6659
Rear Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Rear Door Latch
Rear Door Latch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6660
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear See: Rear
Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Rear.
4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear door latch.
- Slide the rear door latch toward the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Rear
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
2. Remove the door handle screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6664
3. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw.
5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
6. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
6674
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
6675
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 6681
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 6682
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Rear Door Window
Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear >
Page 6685
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 6693
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 6694
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch
Hood Latch
Removal
1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut.
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
Remove the 2 hood latch bolts.
3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable.
1. Release the cable conduit.
2. Disconnect the cable.
4. Remove the hood latch.
5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever.
Installation
1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch.
1. Connect the cable.
2. Engage the cable conduit.
2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket.
3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the
latch is installed and aligned correctly.
Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts.
- Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 6700
4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 6701
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View > Page 6706
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Handle
Hood Latch Release Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch See: Hood Latch/Service
and Repair/Hood Latch.
2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides.
- Note the routing of the hood latch release cable.
3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Breaking the tab does not require handle assembly replacement.
Using a suitable tool, push up on the tab to snap it off and then slide the handle off the instrument
panel.
5. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl
panel into the passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
- Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6714
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 6720
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6724
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair
Liftgate Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws.
3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips.
4. NOTE: If equipped with a rear wiper, the rear glass must be open.
Remove the liftgate trim panel.
5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the liftgate trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach the to the liftgate trim panel
before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6735
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
Liftgate Latch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors.
3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6736
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch
Liftgate Window Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch
bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System
Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 6751
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 6757
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6758
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6759
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information >
Service and Repair
License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair
License Plate Housing
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector.
3. Remove the license plate housing retaining nuts (4 required).
4. Release the license plate housing from the push clips and remove the license plate housing from
the liftgate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Fender Splash Shield
Fender Splash Shield
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield > Page 6773
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation
Subframe and Mounting Systems
Front Subframe
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.
Rear Subframe
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
Welding Precautions
The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal
Inert Gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean
and free of foreign materials.
- Do not weld on the subframe.
- The correct protective clothing should always be worn.
- Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases.
- A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample.
- Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of
weld being used.
- Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery.
- On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
- Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical
currents when welding.
- Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through
painted surfaces or E-coat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring
Corrosion Protection Following Repair.
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine
Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine
Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 6787
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame
- Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On
Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame
- Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 6793
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6794
Front Cross-Member: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6795
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6796
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6797
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6798
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member: > Page 6799
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone
Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member Bushing: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On
Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-22-19 > Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone
Noise On Acceleration > Page 6808
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-22-19 >
Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
Front Cross-Member Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone
Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-22-19 >
Nov > 09 > Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration > Page 6814
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-12-16 > Jun >
09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
Vibration Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH
TSB 09-12-16
06/29/09
4WD, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - WHINE NOISE 60-70 MPH (96-112 KM/H)
FORD: 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and four
wheel drive (4WD) system may exhibit a whine noise from the power transfer unit (PTU) at highway
speeds 60-70 MPH (96-112 Km/h).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Add a mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 307-01A: Automatic Transaxle/Transmission.
1. Remove the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator through-bolt. (Figure 1)
2. Add the mass damper to the lower, rear, transaxle support insulator. (Figure 2)
3. Install the through bolt and tighten to 85 +/- 13 lb-ft (115 +/- 17 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > 09-12-16 > Jun >
09 > 4X4 System - PTU Whining Noise At 60-70 MPH > Page 6820
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.2 Hr.
4WD 2.5L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
091216A 2009 Escape, Mariner 0.3 Hr.
4WD 3.0L Engine: Install Mass Damper Following Service Procedure (Do Not Use With 6038A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6068 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6821
Front Cross-Member Bushing: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6822
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6823
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6824
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-22-19 Date: 091116
Body/Frame - Engine Moan/Drone Noise On Acceleration
TSB 09-22-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6825
11/16/09
ENGINE NOISE, DRONE/MOAN SOUND 1800-2300 RPM - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/10/2009
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 8/10/2009
may exhibit a slightly louder than normal drone/moan noise on acceleration at approximately
1800-2300 RPM.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Disable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
414-03 High voltage traction battery systems
depowering.
2. Remove the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. (Figure 1)
3. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. (Figure 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member Bushing > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Cross-Member Bushing: > Page 6826
4. Remove the nut, bolts and engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. (Figure 3)
5. Replace the engine support crossmember with improved service level crossmember. Tighten the
bolts to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m), tighten the new nut to
129 lb-ft. (175 N.m). (Figure 3)
NOTE
THIS PART IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO 2009-2010 VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 8/10/2009, AND
WILL NOT CORRECT ANY OTHER SYMPTOM.
6. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. Tighten to 66 lb-ft. (90 N.m). (Figure
2)
7. Install the lower transaxle insulator through bolt. Tighten to 85 lb-ft. (115 N.m). (Figure 1)
8. Enable the vehicle high voltage electrical system following WSM, Section 414-03.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092219A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Engine Support Cross Member (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6P094 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6836
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6837
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6843
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6844
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard
Start/DTC's Set
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Rough Running/Hard
Start/DTC's Set
TSB 11-1-5
01/25/11
RUNS ROUGH, HARD START AFTER REFUELING, AUDIBLE CLICKING NOISE UNDER
HOOD, AND/OR DTCS P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X, BUILT ON OR BEFORE
11/1/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2010 F-150 2009-2011 E-Series, Escape, Expedition 2011 F-250,
F-350
LINCOLN: 2011 MKZ 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 F-150, 2009-2011 Expedition, Navigator, E-Series, Escape Hybrid,
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid and F-Super Duty
250/350 equipped with a 6.2L engine and built on or before 11/1/2010, may exhibit a running rough
concern, hard start after refueling, audible clicking noise under the hood and/or diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) P0316, P144A, P1450, PO17X, P044X, P045X.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section
303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 11-1-5 > Jan > 11 > Emissions - Rough Running/Hard
Start/DTC's Set > Page 6850
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110105A 2009-2011 Expedition, 0.6 Hr.
Navigator, And Econoline 2009-2010 F-150: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission
Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Escape Hybrid, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid, 2010-2011 Fusion Hybrid, Milan Hybrid, 2011 MKZ Hybrid, And 2011 F-Super Duty
6.2L: Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
110105A 2009-2011 Econoline: 0.9 Hr.
Check DTCs, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6851
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6852
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6853
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6854
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6855
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6856
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6857
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6858
Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown, All Other Vehicles Similar
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6859
Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6860
Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6861
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6862
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6863
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 6872
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 6873
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6879
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6880
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 09-11-9 > Jun > 09 > Navigation
Radio - Time Displays Twice In CD Mode
Entertainment System Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Time
Displays Twice In CD Mode
TSB 09-11-9
06/15/09
NAVIGATION RADIO - WHEN ON IN CD MODE - TIME DISPLAYS TWICE IN THE FDIM
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Navigation radio, may exhibit a
concern when turning on the audio unit in CD mode. The time will display twice in the Front Display
lnter[ace Module (FDIM), both in the center and in the upper right hand corner. Normal operation
should be the time displaying in the center of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is off and in the
upper right hand corner of the FDIM when the Navigation unit is on.
ACTION Reprogram the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) module to the latest calibration
using IDS release 61.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091109A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The FDIM (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19C116 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6886
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6887
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6888
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6889
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6890
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6891
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6900
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6901
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6907
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6908
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column
Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6914
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6915
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6916
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6917
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6918
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6919
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6920
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6921
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6922
All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position
the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6923
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 6932
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 6933
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6939
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6940
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
Catalytic Converter Mounting Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine
Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 6946
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6947
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6948
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6949
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6950
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6951
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6952
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: Customer Interest Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)
5. Remove the radiator grille.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6961
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6962
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)
5. Remove the radiator grille.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6968
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6969
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6970
Grille: Service and Repair
Radiator Grille
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
Escape only
2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6971
3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts.
4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia.
Mariner only
5. Push outward on the 12 radiator grille clips to release the radiator grille from the bumper cover
and remove the radiator grille.
All vehicles
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6982
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6983
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6984
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6985
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6986
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6987
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6988
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 6989
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
Headliner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/A-Pillar Trim Panel.
2. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/B-Pillar
Trim Panel.
3. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/C-Pillar
Trim Panel.
4. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/D-Pillar Trim Panel.
5. Open the overhead console door.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6993
6. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips.
- Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
- Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner.
9. Using a small flat screwdriver, release and remove the interior lamp lens.
10. Remove the interior lamp.
- Early build, remove the 2 screws.
- Late build, remove the 2 pushpins.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
11. Remove the cargo lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
12. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers.
13. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
14. If equipped, remove the screw and the garment hook.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6994
- Open the garment hook screw cover.
- Remove the garment hook screw. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
15. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and
have no gaps or overlaps.
If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring.
16. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers.
17. Remove the headliner.
18. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Interior Trim - Exploded View
Interior Trim - Exploded View
Early Build
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 6999
Late Build
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7000
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7001
Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel
A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
All trim panels
1. Position the LH or RH front door weatherstrips aside.
Passenger side only
2. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
3. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screws and remove the assist handle.
All trim panels
4. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips.
Driver side only
5. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar
tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is
being installed.
Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel.
- Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip.
- Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards.
All trim panels
6. Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
Installation
All trim panels
1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel.
Driver side only
2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does
not fasten correctly. During a side air
curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel.
- Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully
seated.
3. NOTICE: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will
occur.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the A-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and
attach them to the A-pillar trim panel before installing.
NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel
tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel.
Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar.
Passenger side only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7002
4. Install the A-pillar assist handle and install the screws.
5. Install the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
All trim panels
6. Install the LH or RH front door opening weatherstrips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7003
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
Upper
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover
out at the bottom.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Position the front and rear door opening weatherstrips aside.
4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt.
Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Lower
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the 2 pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
All vehicles
8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the B-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the B-pillar trim
panel before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7004
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
Early and late build
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
4. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside.
Early build
5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the C-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the C-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the cover, the bolt and the C-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Late build
6. Release the C-pillar coat hook by inserting a small flat screwdriver in the slot at the base of the
coat hook.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7005
7. Remove the coat hook.
- LH coat hook, twist clockwise.
- RH coat hook, twist counterclockwise.
8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Early and late build
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7006
Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel
D-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
2. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the D-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the D-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the D-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel - Exploded View
Instrument Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7010
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder
and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair
package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key
code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See:
Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service
and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1. Release the clips.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Key: Testing and Inspection Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7020
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to
be programmed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7021
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7022
Key: Testing and Inspection Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will start.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7023
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7024
Key: Testing and Inspection Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7025
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7026
Key: Testing and Inspection
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If
the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the
customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In
this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: IGNITION KEY CODE ERASE. Follow all Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) screen instructions until the key
erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the
process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, then the RKE data
transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC), refer to Key Programming Using Two
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7027
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for
each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This
programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet
purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle
driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLED,
the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This switch is
set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys procedure.
1. Insert a programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key (or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the
key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLED, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING ENABLE - spare key programming procedure is
accessible.
- CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING DISABLE - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure works only if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not
enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID.
The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle will start.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7028
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed ignition key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to
the ON position.
2. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed ignition
key (can be an IKT or a standard PATS key) into
the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the second key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed ignition key
(new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON
position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data
transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7029
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all of the vehicle keys so they contain the
same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen
instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
8. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
9. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
5. Insert the first PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
6. Remove the first PATS key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the next PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3
seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7030
8. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
procedure. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each
additional key that needs to be programmed. The PID SPAREKEY must be enabled.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be installed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the N_KEYCODE PID.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: When using the IDS, the Instrument Cluster (IC) and the Transmission Control Module
(TCM) parameters are reset at the same time.
NOTE: Once security access has been granted, multiple security access commands should be
executed (if necessary) prior to exiting the command menu. This avoids an additional security
access procedure and the associated 10 minute time delay.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment > Page 7031
NOTE: Repair all Battery Control Module (BCM) DTCs and make sure the high voltage disconnect
is installed before carrying out a parameter reset. A parameter reset will not occur if the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) is not working correctly.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select BODY-SECURITY-PATS Functions and follow the
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY
ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC was replaced, follow Steps 4-9. If the IC and the TCM were replaced, follow
Steps 4-9. If only the TCM was replaced, the
procedure is completed.
NOTE: If steps 4-9 are followed, 2 keys must be present.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. NOTE: Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys require a 6-second programming time frame
for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) data
transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is an IKT key).
7. Remove the key and cycle the second key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (if it is
an IKT key).
8. Both keys will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions of the vehicle (if they
are IKT keys).
9. NOTE: The RKE data transfer will take place between the key and the IC first. After both keys
are programmed into the IC, the RKE data will
transfer from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into
the SJB, the RKE functions will not operate.
If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7036
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7037
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Code
NOTE: Up to 3 personal codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 personal programmed
codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad.
3. Enter the new 5-digit personal keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing the Personal Codes
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code
will work.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7038
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum
number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7043
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7044
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
2 times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7045
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Perimeter Lighting Feature Programming
Programming the Perimeter Lighting Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions.
1. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position.
2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position.
4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The horn chirps one time to indicate that
programming mode is entered.
6. NOTE: The unlock button must be pressed twice within 5 seconds.
Within 30 seconds of entering the programming mode, press the unlock button on the door lock
control switch twice to enable/disable the perimeter lighting feature. The horn chirps once if the
perimeter lighting is disabled or a chirp followed by a honk if the perimeter lighting is enabled.
7. Programming ends when the ignition switch state changes or times out after 2 minutes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7046
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear > Page 7052
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7055
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7056
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7057
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 7062
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7065
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7066
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7067
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7068
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror
Glass Cracking
Heated Element: Customer Interest Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror
Glass Cracking > Page 7081
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior
Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
Heated Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass
Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior
Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 7087
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass See:
Service and Repair/Exterior Mirror Glass.
2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw.
3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs.
4. Remove the exterior mirror motor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7094
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7095
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7096
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7097
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7098
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Support: Locations
Front Structure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7106
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7107
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7112
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7115
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7116
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7117
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7121
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7132
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws and the roof opening panel motor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 7137
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7138
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7139
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7145
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Trough Assembly
Trough Assembly
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and
Repair/Roof Opening Panel Glass.
2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7153
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses.
3. Release the wire harness locators.
4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame.
- To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel glass is centered and aligned correctly. For additional
information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7157
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
1. For additional information, refer to the individual procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7162
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Glass
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Position the roof opening panel to the CLOSED position.
2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass.
- To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7163
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield
Roof Opening Panel Shield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel drain trough. For additional information, refer to Trough
Assembly See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and
Repair/Trough Assembly.
2. Slide the roof opening panel shield forward halfway.
3. Disengage the roof opening panel shield guide feet.
- Lift the front portion of the roof opening panel shield upward at center until able to disengage one
of the front guide feet.
4. With one of the guide feet released, carefully rotate the roof opening panel shield in a clockwise
manner to disengage the remaining guide feet.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
7168
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
7169
Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
7170
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
7171
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7175
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7176
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7177
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7178
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7179
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7180
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Back: Removal and Replacement
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7185
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7186
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7187
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the recliner handle.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the outboard side shield forward. Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip.
- For driver seat, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the inboard side shield.
- For driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook.
5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer
from the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track.
- Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion.
7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
9. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
Damage to the wire harness may occur.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.
- Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track
bolts (manual seat) and backrest.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Rear Seat Backrest
Seat Backrest - Rear
Removal
NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest
(60 percent).
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View.
Both rear seat backrests
1. Position both rear seat cushions forward.
2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps.
3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
LH rear seat backrest
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7188
4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt.
5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
Both rear seat backrests
6. Release and position both rear backrests downward.
7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside.
8. Remove the bolt cover.
9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard
backrest-to-floor bolt.
10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest.
LH rear seat backrest
11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest.
Installation
NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest
(40 percent).
NOTE: The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
LH rear seat backrest
1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time.
RH rear seat backrest
3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Install the bolt cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7189
6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers.
9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests.
10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH rear seat backrest
12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps.
14. Position both rear seat cushions in place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7190
Seat Back: Overhaul
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger similar.
Disassembly
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Removal and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest -
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7191
Front.
2. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front.
3. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers.
4. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module.
5. Remove the backrest foam pad.
6. If equipped, remove the lumbar assembly.
- Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjuster.
- Release the lumbar assembly from the backrest frame wires and remove.
Assembly
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur.
1. If equipped, install the lumbar assembly.
- Install the lumbar assembly to the backrest frame wires.
- Install the lumbar adjuster and 2 screws.
2. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
4. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7192
5. Install the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat Backrest Cover - Front.
6. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal
and Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest Front.
Seat Backrest - Rear
Seat Backrest - Rear
NOTE: LH (60 percent) shown, RH (40 percent) similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7193
Disassembly and Assembly
Both rear seat backrests
1. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat
Backrest Cover.
2. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
Sixty percent seat backrest
3. Release the seat latch cable from the center safety belt retractor.
- For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode after installation. For additional information, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
4. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the nut and center safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
6. Remove the 2 bolts and backrest latch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7194
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and inboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
8. Remove the bolt and outboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS)
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7203
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7204
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7205
092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7206
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS)
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7212
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7213
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7214
092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 7215
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400
TSB 10-18-3
09/27/10
HYBRID - MIL ON DTCS PO13A, P0030, P0130 AND/OR P0400
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-20-6 to update the vehicle model years, Service Issue, Service
Procedure and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P013A and/or P0400. Vehicles built on or before
6/24/2009 with DTC P013A may be caused by an exhaust leak at the manifold catalyst flange.
Some 2010 Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit any of the following DTCs;
P013A , P0030, and P0130 and/or P0400. An improved calibration is available for these vehicles.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles with a DTC P013A built on or before 6/24/2009 follow Procedure A and B. Vehicles built
on or after 6/25/2009 perform Procedure B.
Procedure A
1. Restrict exhaust flow at the tailpipe and inspect for carbon soot/moisture witness marks
indicating a leak at the manifold catalyst flange. Misting a
soapy water spray solution on the flange while the exhaust is restricted will increase the ability to
identify and confirm leaks.
2. Is a leak present?
a. No - Skip to Procedure B.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
3. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the manifold catalyst. Refer to Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 309-00.
4. Inspect the flange for evidence of weld or other material that is raised on the sealing surface and
may prevent complete sealing at the joint. If this
condition is found, replace the manifold catalyst assembly and both heated oxygen sensors (H025).
Refer to WSM 309-00.
5. Proceed to Procedure B.
Procedure B
Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 68.07
and higher or 69.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 7221
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's
P0442/P0456/P1450
TSB 10-1-3
02/01/10
HYBRID ONLY - DTCS P0442, P0456 OR P1450 - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 4/6/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-9-9 to add a production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion Hybrid and Milan Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 4/6/2009 may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) accompanied by
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0442, P0456 or P1450.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual diagnostic procedures for
any DTC code that may be present to ensure the
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) system is functioning properly.
2. When performing EVAP diagnostics on Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles, the ambient
temperature must be greater than 32 °F (0 °C) and
the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) system should be set to Defrost. This will provide
continuous gasoline engine operation.
3. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release
60.11 and higher or 61.01 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100103A 2010 Fusion Hybrid/Milan 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On EVAP System Use
SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time)
100103A 2009 Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM (For Additional Repairs On
EVAP System Use SLTS Operations If Available Claim Additional Diagnosis Or Labor Performed
As Actual Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 >
Page 7226
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-18-3 > Sep > 10 > Engine Controls/Exhaust - MIL ON/DTCs
P013A/P0130/P0400 > Page 7232
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101803A 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
101803B 2009-2010 Escape Hybrid, 1.7 Hrs. Mariner Hybrid: Check DTCs, Replace The Manifold
Catalyst Assembly And Both HO2S Sensors, Then Reprogram The PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 10-1-3 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0456/P1450 >
Page 7237
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seats
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7240
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7241
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7242
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
2. Press the buttons and remove the head restraint.
3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides.
4. If equipped, remove the lumbar adjust knob.
5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the
elastic loop in the backrest trim cover.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam.
Partially invert the backrest cover up to the side air bag.
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7243
9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest
foam pad. Note positioning of the deployment chute for correct installation.
10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover.
11. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Air Bag Systems.
Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air
Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front See:
Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seat Cushion.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7244
Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover.
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
4. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
6. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
7. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
9. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7245
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7246
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Backrest Cover
Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Rear Seat - Exploded View.
1. Remove the rear seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Rear See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Seat Backrest.
2. Remove the head restraint(s).
3. Remove the 2 screws and latch cover.
4. Remove the 2 seat latch release handle screws.
5. Remove the seat latch release handle.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release handle.
- To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release handle.
6. Release the backrest cover J-clip.
7. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
8. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame.
- Note the alignment tab position for correct installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Seats > Page 7247
9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip
or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement
Front Seat Cushion
Seat Cushion - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
2. NOTE: To identify between a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and a
service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service
kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or
altered.
NOTE: If removing a production OCS system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate
procedure in Air Bag Systems.
Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical
connectors.
- For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from
the service part OCS electrical connector.
Heated seat
3. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion
frame.
All seats
6. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame.
- Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Remove the seat cushion.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7252
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
12. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
13. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
14. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS
fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Seat Cushion Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7253
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
2. Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7254
Seat Cushion: Overhaul
Seat Cushion - Driver
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual similar.
Disassembly
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7255
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
- Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
6. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release the all the retainers and remove the cushion cover.
7. Remove the cushion foam pad.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
8. If equipped, release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the
cushion frame.
- Disconnect the relay electrical connector.
9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
NOTE: Seat equipped with a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system shown. For
OCS system service components, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit procedure
in Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7256
Disassembly
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7257
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air
Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
NOTE: OCS system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and
Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as
an assembly.
All seats
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Front
Seats/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation.
Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track.
5. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
6. If equipped, disconnect the heated seat system components.
- Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
- Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
Seat with original equipment Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
7. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the
kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Detach the wiring harness retainers and wiring harness from the cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7258
9. Remove the cushion foam pad.
10. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket.
11. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
12. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
13. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove
as an assembly with the bladder.
Seat with OCS system service kit
14. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS
electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame.
15. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips
or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
16. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket.
17. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7259
18. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion frame opening.
Assembly
All seats
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Seat with original equipment OCS system
2. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through
the correct seat cushion support opening
can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat
cushion frame.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7260
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the cushion frame.
9. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
10. Install the wiring harness.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Attach the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
Seat with OCS system service kit
11. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and
support assembly for any foreign objects,
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the
correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Route the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion frame.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7261
12. NOTE: When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion frame.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
13. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the seat cushion frame.
14. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
- Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system
electrical connector.
- Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
- Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7262
- Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside.
All seats
16. If equipped, connect the heated seat components.
- Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
- Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame.
17. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track.
18. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors.
- Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame.
- Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
19. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
20. Install the seat. Do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Front.
21. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
22. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
23. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Air Bag Systems.
24. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7263
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Rear Seat Cushion
Seat Cushion - Rear
NOTE: RH (40 percent) shown, LH (60 percent) similar.
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 7264
2. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
3. Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and cushion pivot upper link.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7269
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7270
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7271
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7272
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7273
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7274
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7275
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7276
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7277
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7278
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7279
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7280
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7281
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7282
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7283
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7284
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7285
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7286
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7287
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7288
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7289
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7290
119-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7291
Seat Heater: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7292
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7293
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7297
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7298
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay > Page 7303
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7306
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7307
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7308
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7313
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7314
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7315
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track
Seat Track
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seats/Seat Backrest - Front.
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track.
- If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
4. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 7320
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 7321
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 7322
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 7331
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7334
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7335
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7336
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7337
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7341
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7342
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7343
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7345
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7349
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7350
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7351
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7352
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7353
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7354
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 7360
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7365
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7366
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 7367
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seats/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 7372
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7373
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7374
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7375
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 7388
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN
PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 7394
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7395
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7396
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Insulation
Insulation
Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the
interior of the vehicle. Mastic insulators are also used as insulation. For information on the location
of the mastic insulators, refer to Sound Deadeners and Insulators. See: Sound Deadeners and
Insulators Insulation is installed:
- under the roof.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- at the cowl side panels.
- over the front and rear floor pans.
- inside the A-, B-, D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 7401
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators
SOUND DEADENERS AND INSULATORS
WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear
protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and
chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTICE:
- Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding
procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to
burn.
- Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied.
Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur.
NOTE:
- To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators
should be installed with the correct service replacement component.
- The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations.
Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration.
Sound Deadeners and Insulators
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and
insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in
this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 7402
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7417
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7418
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7423
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7429
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7430
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7435
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 7438
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Window Glass - Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7447
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7448
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7454
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7455
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 7458
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page
7463
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed
Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed
Control Switch > Page 7468
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7473
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Switch
Escape and Mariner shown, Hybrid similar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Switch > Page 7478
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the speed control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the speed control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the speed control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm
Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm
Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7482
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7486
Vacuum Brake Booster Diaphragm Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Brake Booster Travel Sensor - Hybrid
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the brake booster travel sensor electrical connector.
2. Release the brake booster travel sensor retainer ring and remove the travel sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the multi-calibration routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical
connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7495
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7496
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7497
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7498
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7499
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7500
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Compass: Description and Operation
Electronic Compass
The compass display is incorporated into the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) for vehicles
without navigation.
For vehicles with navigation, the compass display is incorporated into the Audio Control Module
(ACM). Refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Vehicles With Navigation
The compass signal originates from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. No calibration
or zone adjustment is available, as the compass heading is based on the GPS signal. Refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the ACM and indicates the
current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW).
Vehicles Without Navigation
The compass signal originates from the compass module, which is integrated into the interior rear
view mirror. Refer to Mirrors.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower LH side of the
FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The
compass continuously re-calibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate
during most driving conditions.
All Vehicles
The MODE button that allows the driver to operate the calibration and zone setting procedures is
located on the center bottom of the interior rear view mirror. The compass display is on with the key
in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or START position, there is a
momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass display illuminates. If the battery
saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START, the momentary delay before the
compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The compass display will turn off as soon
as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position.
Compass Accuracy (without Navigation)
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily
change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects,
calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the
northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes
noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Refer
to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment.
Compass Accuracy (with Navigation)
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures have no effect on the
compass heading.
Compass calibration and compass zone setting procedures are not required if the vehicle is
equipped with navigation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Electronic Compass
Inspection And Verification
Electronic Compass
Inspection and Verification
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7521
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the FDIM and the
Instrument Cluster (IC).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in
Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7522
Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Electronic Compass
DTC Charts
B2097 / U2013
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7523
Compass: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Electronic Compass
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7524
Compass: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground
for the FDIM is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module provides vehicle
directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM
over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass
direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC.
- DTC B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the IC attempts a self-test of the compass
module and its associated circuits and a failure results.
- DTC U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the IC does not receive any
communications from the compass module.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Compass module
- FDIM (compass display)
- IC
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE COMPASS DISPLAY
- Ignition ON.
- Check the compass display.
- Does the compass display illuminate?
Yes
If the compass display illuminates with only 2 bars, GO to A3.
If the compass display turns on, but it does not display all directions, or indicates CAL, Go To
Pinpoint Test b. See: Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
No
GO to A2.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
- Verify the vehicle is equipped with the compass feature.
- Is the vehicle equipped with the compass feature?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7525
Yes
REFER to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc to diagnose the FDIM display.
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer and ADVISE them the vehicle is not equipped with a
compass display feature.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUIT CBP41 (BU) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror C9012-1, circuit CBP41 (BU), harness
side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK CIRCUIT GD182 (BK/GY) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-3, circuit GD182 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC31 (YE/GN) FOR AN OPEN OR A
SHORT TO GROUND
- Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7526
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN),
harness side and the IC C220-16, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side; and between the interior
rear view mirror C9012-6, circuit VMC31 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK CIRCUIT VMC30 (BU/GY) FOR AN OPEN OR A
SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY),
harness side and the IC C220-17, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side; and between the interior
rear view mirror C9012-7, circuit VMC30 (BU/GY), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A7.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK FOR DTC U2013
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Connect: IC C220.
- Connect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012.
- Ignition ON.
- Clear the DTCs.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Wait 10 seconds.
- Retrieve the IC DTCs.
- Is DTC U2013 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new interior rear view mirror. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone
Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7527
Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See:
Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A8.
------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. RESET the parameters in both the IC and the PCM. REFER to Antitheft and
Alarm Systems. PROGRAM the PATS keys into the new IC. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm
Systems. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc.
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground
for the compass display is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (integral
to the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC),
which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that
has been provided by the compass module to the IC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Magnetized vehicle
- Compass zone setting
- Compass calibration
- Compass module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 DEMAGNETIZE THE VEHICLE
- Demagnetize the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Demagnetizing See: Adjustments/Vehicle
Demagnetizing.
- Does the compass operate correctly?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7528
Yes
The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a
magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration.
No
GO to B2.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE COMPASS ACCURACY
- Position the vehicle and observe the compass display as follows:
- Does the compass display as indicated?
Yes
The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting, a
magnetized vehicle, or the compass was out of calibration.
No
INSTALL a new compass module. SET the zone. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See:
Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass
Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass Zone Adjustment
1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the
geographic location of the vehicle.
2. With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the MODE button (for approximately 5
seconds) until the display shows the current zone
setting. Release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: After approximately 5 seconds, the compass display will exit the zone setting mode after
the button has been released.
Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the
MODE button to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the
vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map.
4. Release the switch for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7531
Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing
Vehicle Demagnetizing
NOTICE: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil pulls toward the vehicle. Place a cloth over
the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the front
third and the entire width of the roof.
NOTE: The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by
television repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes.
NOTE: To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the
demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained
in the vehicle.
NOTE: During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side
opposite the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface.
1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof.
1. Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle.
2. Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the
passenger side, demagnetize the front third of
the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius
within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the
windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times.
3. After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from
the vehicle.
4. Turn the demagnetizer off.
2. Carry out the compass zone adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to Compass
Zone Adjustment See: Compass Zone
Adjustment.
3. Carry out the compass calibration adjustment procedure. For additional information, refer to
Compass Calibration See: Compass Calibration.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7532
Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration
Compass Calibration
NOTE: This procedure is applicable only to vehicles not equipped with navigation.
1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects
or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make
sure all doors are closed.
Start the vehicle.
2. NOTE: It is not possible to exit the CAL mode unless the vehicle is driven in circles.
NOTE: While holding the MODE button down, the compass display will first enter the ZONE setting
mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (10 seconds total), the compass display
will enter the CAL mode.
Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the MODE button until CAL appears in the display,
then release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times,
repeat the procedure.
Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until CAL disappears
from the display and the compass heading is shown.
4. If the CAL message does not turn off within 5 circles (and the procedure has been repeated at
least once), install a new compass module (integral
to the interior rear view mirror).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7538
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7539
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7540
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7541
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7542
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7543
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7544
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7545
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7552
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7556
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 7559
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7563
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 7566
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 7567
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 7568
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 7569
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7575
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7576
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB) located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7577
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7578
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7579
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB.
21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7580
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7581
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE: Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the
driver air bag module hooks during installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 7582
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a
pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled as International Standards
Organization (ISO) engine symbol.
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the key is in the ON or START position.
- The MIL remains on in the on/start mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster prove-out
for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: the PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC is set.
- the instrument cluster illuminates the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- If the MIL remains off during the bulb check, there is: an instrument cluster concern.
- an instrument cluster wiring concern.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For any MIL concern, refer to Symptom Charts, GO to Quick Test QT1 See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/QT : Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
Quick Test .
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change (approximately 10,000 miles
[16,000 km] or 12 months) perform the following.
1. Press the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE= XXX% HOLD RESET=NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed.
3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life start value is desired, press and
release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the
start value by 10 percent.
NOTE: Oil life start value of 100% equals 10,000 miles [16,000 km] or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 6,000 miles [9,600 km] and 219 days.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7605
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7608
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7609
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7610
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7611
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine
Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter Element and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 1 of 2)
Oil Filter Adapter, Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch (view 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7612
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch > Page 7613
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit
To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-5-5 > Mar >
09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-5-5 > Mar >
09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 7632
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-5-5 > Mar >
09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 7638
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7645
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7646
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-23-12 >
Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins:
> 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel
Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front
Wheel
TSB 09-5-5
03/23/09
LEFT FRONT ABS SENSOR CONTACTING TONE RING - VEHICLES BUILT
10/21/2008-10/31/2008
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built from
10/21/2008 to 10/31/2008 may exhibit a clicking or rubbing noise from the left front wheel speed
sensor and/or exhibit ABS warning light activation. The left front wheel knuckle may have been
machined incorrectly allowing the wheel speed sensor to contact the tone ring.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Measure the air gap between the left front wheel speed sensor and tone ring with a feeler gage.
2. If 0.02" (0.50 mm) or more - this procedure does not apply. Continue with normal diagnostics.
3. If less than 0.02" (0.5 mm) or evidence of contact - replace the left front wheel knuckle per
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-01 and the left
front Wheel Speed Sensor per WSM, Section 206-09.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090505A 2009 Escape Hybrid, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time
To Measure Air Gap This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505A 2009 Escape, Mariner: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace The Left Front Wheel Knuckle And Wheel Speed Sensor Includes Time To Measure Air
Gap This Labor Operation Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 7666
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-5-5 > Mar > 09 > ABS/TCS - Clicking Noise From Left Front Wheel > Page 7672
Be Claimed With Operations B And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001 B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Check Caster,
Camber And Toe In Can Be Claimed With Operation A And/Or C (Do Not Use With 2001B,
2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090505C 2009 Escape, Mariner, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid:
Correct Toe-In Can
Be Claimed With Operation A And B (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D,
2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3K186 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Steps 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position being disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7686
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 7690
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
7693
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
7694
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
7695
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
7696
7. NOTE: For initial fuel draining, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe
recirculation tube port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel (from a completely full tank), lowering the
fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the FP module
when removing the lock ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal and lock ring.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment arrows on the FP module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7700
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7701
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to
activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not
respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate
the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 7707
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 7708
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it to reflect the most recent pressure data.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7713
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7714
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7722
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7723
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7724
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7729
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7730
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7731
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7732
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7733
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7734
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7735
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7736
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7737
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7738
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7739
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7740
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7741
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7742
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7743
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7744
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7745
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7746
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7747
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7748
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7749
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7750
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7751
90-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7752
90-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Stoplamps
Principles Of Operation
Stoplamps
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal
is applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies
voltage to the stoplamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) is a type of transistor that when used with module software can be
used to monitor and control current flow on module outputs. The FET protection strategy is used to
prevent module damage in the event of excessive current flow.
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, a headlamp
output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short
circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault
event is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter is
started.
When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the FET circuit protection
to allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been
shut down by a previous short (FET protection) and the circuit remains shorted, the FET protection
shuts off the circuit again and the cumulative counter advances.
When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. Each FET protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit
tolerance based on the harmful effect of each circuit fault on the FET and the ability of the FET to
withstand it. A module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the
FET. If the total tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would
be 200, 400 and 600 fault events.
When each tolerance level is reached, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure
cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not allow this
code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful self-test proves that
the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs
present), DTC B106E and the associated continuous DTC (the DTC related to the shorted circuit)
automatically clears and the circuit function returns.
When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC (associated with the short circuit)
sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs can be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7755
cleared using the module on-demand self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool (if
the on-demand test shows the fault corrected). The module never resets the fault event counter to
zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur.
If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then DTCs B106F and B1342 set
along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are the LH rear stop/turn lamp and
the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits.
Inspection And Verification
Stoplamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7756
Brake Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Stoplamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7757
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBP02 (YE/RD) from the Smart Junction
Box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the SJB
and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). The SJB provides voltage to the
rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is
applied.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 2 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to I3. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD),
harness side and the stoplamp switch C278-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7758
- Are the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and
Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK CIRCUIT SBP02 (YE/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness
side and the SJB C2280d-13, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to I4.
No
REPAIR SBP02 (YE/RD) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7759
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the
brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits
CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is
provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided
through circuit GD183 (BK/WH).
NOTE: SJB fuse 6 (20A) supplies voltage for both combination rear stop/turn lamps and both front
turn lamps.
B106E-B2047
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- High mounted stoplamp
- Bulb holder
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- J1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP
- Ignition OFF.
- Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps.
- Are all the stoplamps inoperative?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7760
Go To Pinpoint Test H. See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Autolamps/Pinpoint
Test H: The Autolamps Are On Continuously
No
For the high mounted stoplamp, GO to J2.
If only one side (the LH or RH rear stoplamp) is inoperative, GO to J6.
If both sides (LH and RH rear stoplamps) are inoperative, VERIFY the SJB fuse 6 (20A) is OK. If
OK, GO to J4. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the
stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C475.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and the high mounted stoplamp C475-2, circuit
GD183 (BK/WH), harness side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7761
REPAIR circuit GD183 (BK/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LH STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C4035.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J5.
------------------------------------------------- J5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SJB
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J11.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J6 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB
SELF-TEST
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the on-demand self-test.
- Is DTC B2045 or DTC B2047 present?
Yes
GO to J7.
No
GO to J10.
------------------------------------------------- J7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7762
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J8.
No
GO to J9.
------------------------------------------------- J8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the LH rear lamp C4035-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness
side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the RH rear
lamp C4032-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J9 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side
and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp
C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG),
harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J10 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7763
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the self-test (required to enable the turn lamp output driver if DTC
B106E is present).
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J11.
------------------------------------------------- J11 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR
A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Disconnect: LH and RH Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relays.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) (LH rear stoplamp) or circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) (RH rear stoplamp)
for a short to ground. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the turn
lamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J12 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7764
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, the PCM and the speed control actuator through circuit CCB08
(VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and
RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped
with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay.
- DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit.
- DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
- DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- PCM
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST K: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- K1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE
ILLUMINATED
- Ignition OFF.
- Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released.
- Are all of the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
GO to K2.
------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7765
Yes
If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) for a short to voltage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K4 .
No
INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and
Repair. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK THE PCM
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K5.
No
GO to K6.
------------------------------------------------- K5 CHECK CIRCUIT CCB08 (VT/WH) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7766
INSTALL a new PCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 7780
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 7781
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 7782
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7796
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7801
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7802
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7803
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7804
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7805
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7806
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7807
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7808
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7809
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7810
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7811
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7812
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7813
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7814
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7815
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7816
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7817
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7818
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7819
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7820
Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
97-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7821
97-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles Of Operation
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
NOTE: When installing a new SJB, it must be configured for this feature, if originally equipped.
Refer to Information Bus.
The SJB controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether
or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include:
- Ignition switch position
- Headlamp switch position
- Headlamps on or off
- Transmission gear selection (automatic transmission)
- Parking brake applied or released (manual transmission)
When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam
headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity.
The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to Information Bus for
additional information on this programmable parameter.
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection And Verification
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
4. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7824
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
6. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM, the Smart
Junction Box (SJB), and the Instrument Cluster (IC).
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems
Information or Body Control Systems.
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7825
Daytime Running Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7826
Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AC: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp
system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic
transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the Smart Junction Box (SJB)
provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the
headlamps at a reduced intensity.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Exterior lighting system input/output
- Ignition switch input
- Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle)
- Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle)
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE DRL ARE INOPERATIVE
------------------------------------------------- AC1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- If equipped with an automatic transaxle, place the gear selector lever in any gear other than
PARK (P).
- If equipped with a manual transaxle, release the parking brake.
Do the DRL illuminate?
Yes
The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the DRL to
operate correctly.
No
GO to AC2.
------------------------------------------------- AC2 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs
- Review the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
- Are any DTCs present?
Yes
REFER to Body Control Systems.
No
GO to AC3.
------------------------------------------------- AC3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS
- Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions (including autolamps if equipped) and observe
the headlamps.
- Do the headlamps and autolamps (if equipped) operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7827
No
REFER to Headlamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection or Autolamps See:
Headlamp/Testing and Inspection.
------------------------------------------------- AC4 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger.
- Monitor the SJB ignition switch PID (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU) while cycling the
ignition switch through all positions (states).
- Does the PID agree with the ignition switch positions?
Yes
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, GO to AC5.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, GO to AC6.
No
REFER to Steering Column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Testing and
Inspection
------------------------------------------------- AC5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger.
- Monitor the PCM transmission gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through
all its positions.
- Does the PID agree with the gear selection?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Refer to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
------------------------------------------------- AC6 CHECK THE BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Apply and release the parking brake while observing the brake warning indicator.
- Does the brake warning indicator operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC7
No
REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators.
------------------------------------------------- AC7 CHECK THE SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Module Programming.
- Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled.
- Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7828
ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 7829
Daytime Running Lamp: Adjustments
Autolamps Time Delay Adjustment
NOTE: The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message center using
the message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following steps.
NOTE: Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period.
1. Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position.
2. Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
5. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. The exterior lamps turn on at this
point.
6. Wait the desired amount of time and place the headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum
of 3 minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the
autolamp time delay is now set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC) finish panel.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dome Lamp: Service and Repair
Interior Lamp
Removal and Installation
1. Open the overhead console storage door to access the screws.
- Remove the 2 screws.
2. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7839
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Fog Lamp Bulb
Mariner
Escape
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7844
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Escape
2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
- Position the fender splash shield aside.
4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector.
5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp.
Mariner
6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7849
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7850
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7851
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7852
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7853
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7854
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7855
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7856
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7857
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7858
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7859
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7860
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7861
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7862
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7863
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7864
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7865
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7866
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7867
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7868
Hazard Warning Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7869
90-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7870
90-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Headlamp Bulb
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector.
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7878
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 7881
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7882
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7883
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7884
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7888
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7889
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7890
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7891
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Specifications
Horn: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Horn: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7897
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7898
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7899
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7900
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7901
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7902
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7903
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7904
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7905
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7906
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7907
Horn: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7908
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7909
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7910
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7911
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7912
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7913
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7914
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7915
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7916
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7917
Horn: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7918
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7919
Horn: Description and Operation
Horn
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
There are 2 separate conditions that can cause the horn to sound. The horn sounds when the
driver presses the horn switch or when the panic button is pressed on the Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT). The horn system uses the SJB to provide voltage to the horn, while the horn
switch or the SJB can provide the ground to engage the horn relay. The horn switch is integrated
into the air bag. For the removal and installation of the air bag, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Horn Location
The horn is mounted on the LH side of the core support behind the bumper cover under the
headlamp.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Horn: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Horn
Inspection and Verification
Horn
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
Principles of Operation
Horn
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The SJB supplies the control voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB). When the horn switch (part
of the steering wheel) is pressed, ground is supplied to the horn relay sending voltage to the horn,
enabling the horn to sound.
The SJB provides a momentary on then off ground when the panic button is pressed on the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7922
Horn: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Horn
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7923
Horn: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Horn Is Inoperative
Horn
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Horn Is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 44 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Horn/Cigar
Lighter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) supplies the voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB). When the
horn switch (part of the steering wheel) is pressed, the switch closes and ground is applied from
the steering wheel switch harness through the clockspring to the horn relay through circuit CRH03
(BN). The horn relay is then energized, applying voltage to the horn through circuit SRH01
(YE/RD), enabling the horn to sound. Ground for the horn is supplied through circuit GD120
(BK/GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Steering wheel switch harness
- Horn
- Clockspring
- Horn switch (part of the steering wheel)
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST A: THE HORN IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE SJB OUTPUT
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB DataLogger.
- Select the SJB PID (HORN), and Command the horn on and then off.
- Does the horn sound when commanded on?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A7.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH03 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
- Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to Air Bag Systems.
- Disconnect: Clockspring C218.
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the voltage between the clockspring C218-1, circuit CRH03 (BN), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7924
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
GO to A3.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH03 (BN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Measure the resistance between SJB C2280b-41 , harness side and the clockspring C218-1,
circuit CRH03 (BN), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A10.
No
REPAIR the circuit. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
- Remove the driver air bag module.
- Disconnect: Upper Clockspring Connector.
- Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218 pin 1, component side and the upper
clockspring connector pin 1, component side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7925
INSTALL a new clockspring. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD112 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218-7, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. INSTALL the driver air bag. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS
FOR DAMAGE OR OPENS
- Inspect the steering wheel switch harness for damage or opens.
- Is the steering wheel switch harness OK?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering wheel. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new steering wheel switch harness. INSTALL the driver air bag module.
TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Disconnect: Horn C1101.
- Measure the resistance between the horn C1101-1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A8.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7926
------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK CIRCUIT SRH01 (YE/RD) FOR VOLTAGE
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the voltage between the horn C1101-2, circuit SRH01 (YE/RD), harness side, and the
horn C1101-1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side, while pressing the horn switch.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new horn. REFER to Horn See: Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal
operation.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 24 (20A) is OK. If OK, GO to A9. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams
to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- A9 CHECK CIRCUIT SRH01 (YE/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280e.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280e-5, circuit SRH01 (YE/RD), harness side, and
the horn C1101-2, circuit SRH01 (YE/RD), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A10.
No
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A10 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7927
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Horn Is Always On
Horn
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The Horn Is Always On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 44 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Horn/Cigar
Lighter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) supplies the voltage to the horn relay (part of the SJB). When the
horn switch (part of the steering wheel) is pressed, the switch closes and ground is applied from
the steering wheel switch harness through the clockspring to the horn relay through circuit CRH03
(BN). The horn relay is then energized, applying voltage to the horn through circuit SRH01
(YE/RD), enabling the horn to sound.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Steering wheel switch harness
- Clockspring
- Horn switch (part of the steering wheel)
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST B: THE HORN IS ALWAYS ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK CIRCUIT SRH01 (YE/RD) FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280e.
- Does the horn continue to sound?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B2.
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE HORN SWITCH INPUT
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Connect: SJB C2280e.
- Does the horn continue to sound?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B3.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK CIRCUIT CRH03 (BN) FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
- Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7928
- Disconnect: Clockspring C218.
- Measure the resistance between the clockspring C218-1, circuit CRH03 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Air Bag Systems. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
- Remove the driver air bag module.
- Connect: Clockspring C218.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-41, circuit CRH03 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
INSTALL a new clockspring. INSTALL the driver air bag module. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------- B5 CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS
FOR DAMAGE OR SHORTS
- Inspect the steering wheel switch harness for damage or shorts.
- Is the steering wheel switch harness OK?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering wheel. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new steering wheel switch harness. INSTALL the driver air bag module.
TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B6 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7929
- corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7930
Horn: Service and Repair
Horn
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and the horn.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
7934
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
7935
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7940
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7941
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7942
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7943
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7944
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7945
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7946
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7947
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7948
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7949
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7950
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7951
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7952
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7953
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7954
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7955
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7956
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7957
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7958
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7959
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7960
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7961
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7966
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7967
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7968
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7969
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7970
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7971
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7972
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7973
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7974
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7975
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7976
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7977
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7978
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7979
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7980
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7981
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7982
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7983
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7984
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7985
Marker Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7987
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7988
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7989
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7990
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8002
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8003
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console finish panel.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8011
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8012
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8016
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8017
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8018
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 > Aug > 09 >
ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 09-15-1 >
Aug > 09 > ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC C1440 Set
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Traction Control Lamp ON/DTC
C1440 Set
TSB 09-15-1
08/10/09
TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT WITH DTC C1440 - BUILT 6/1/2009-6/10/2009
FORD: 2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or
between 6/1/2009 to 6/10/2009, may exhibit the traction control light on with DTC code C1440. If
the vehicle is operated for an extended period following the illumination of the traction control light,
a slight brake drag condition may be observed.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the vehicle was built on or between 6/01/2009 to 6/10/2009, and both the traction control light
and DTC C1440 are present, then replace the brake pedal switch. If only one is present, and not
the other, then proceed with normal diagnostics. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
417-01 for brake pedal switch replacement.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS OR PULL ON BRAKE PEDAL WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE
STOPLAMP SWITCH OTHERWISE MISADJUSTMENT OR DAMAGE TO THE STOPLAMP
SWITCH CAN OCCUR.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091501A 2009 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Stoplamp Switch. Includes Time To Check For DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13480 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8032
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8033
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8034
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Console Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Console Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8041
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8045
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8048
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8049
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8050
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8051
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8055
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8056
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8057
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8058
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8062
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8066
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8067
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8068
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8073
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8074
relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all
removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8075
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8076
found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to
the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8077
Symbols
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8078
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8079
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8080
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8081
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8082
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8083
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8084
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8085
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8086
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8087
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8088
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8089
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8090
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8091
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8092
Tail Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8093
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8094
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8095
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8100
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8101
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuits RAT08 (WH) and GD149 (BK/GY) for all
of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK CIRCUITS RAT08 (WH) AND GD149 (BK/GY)
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8102
grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN
LAMP
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT06 (YE) OR CIRCUIT CAT09 (GN)
FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8103
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS18 (GY/BN) OR CIRCUIT CLS19
(VT/OG) FOR AN OPEN
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK CIRCUIT SBB14 (BN/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8104
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK CIRCUIT CAT11 (BN) FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8105
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK CIRCUIT CLS30 (VT/WH) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8106
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK THE SBB08 (VT/RD) FOR AN OPEN
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short.
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK CIRCUIT GD120 (BK/GN) FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8107
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Carry out the component test for the suspect trailer tow relay.
- Is the trailer tow relay OK?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn), or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8108
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8114
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8118
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8119
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8120
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 8125
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8141
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8142
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8145
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8147
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8148
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8151
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8152
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8153
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8154
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8155
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8156
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8169
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8170
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8171
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8174
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8175
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8176
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 8177
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8180
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8181
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8182
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8183
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8184
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 8185
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8196
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8197
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-4 > Dec >
10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-25-4 > Dec >
10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8202
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8208
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8209
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8214
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto
Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door > Page 8227
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Rear Quarter
Removal
LH rear quarter window glass
1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing.
2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket.
All rear quarter window glass
3. Remove the headliner.
4. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the pinch weld
area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8234
5. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
6. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass removal.
NOTE: Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The
new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins.
Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window
glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter
window glass.
7. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
All rear quarter window glass
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer
and urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
3. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the
existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during glass removal.
4. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
5. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass with glass cleaner.
6. NOTICE: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane
glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of
the window assembly.
NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional
information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new rear window glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8235
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
8. NOTE: The rear quarter glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins
on the glass surface.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear
quarter window glass to specification, making sure there are no gaps in the bead.
9. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the rear quarter window glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air
pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window
glass.
12. Install the headliner.
LH quarter window glass
13. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket and the bolt.
14. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8245
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8246
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8252
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8253
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Window Regulator/Rear Door
Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8266
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8272
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8273
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8278
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 8279
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass
Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Glass
Windshield Glass
Removal
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 8284
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the interior rear view mirror.
5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
7. Remove the cowl panel grille.
8. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the windshield
pinch weld area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
9. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
10. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass removal.
NOTE: Insert the blade into the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool so that the flat side is against the
glass. This will leave the entire urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld and allow a dry fit of the
replacement windshield glass.
Insert the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool at the upper center of the windshield glass and work
toward the bottom corners.
11. Using The Pumper, distance the windshield glass from the body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 8285
12. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove
the windshield glass.
13. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
1. Dry-fit the new windshield glass on the existing urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld.
- Position the windshield glass on the pinch weld.
- Center the windshield glass in the opening.
- Adjust the windshield glass stop blocks (if equipped) as needed for best fit.
- Make alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil (preferably at the windshield glass
stop blocks if equipped) on the windshield glass and the body.
2. After the dry-fit alignment, remove the glass from the windshield opening and place on a stable
work surface with the interior side of the glass
facing up.
3. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld, glass primer and
urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
4. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free, compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around
the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during windshield removal.
5. If reinstalling the same windshield glass, remove the windshield moulding and remaining
urethane adhesive from the glass leaving a thin layer to
bond with the new urethane adhesive bead.
6. Clean the inside of the new windshield glass with glass cleaner.
7. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and
glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane
adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 8286
9. NOTE: The windshield glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld,
starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center, make sure there are no gaps in
the bead.
10. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the windshield glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure
of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
11. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
12. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield
glass.
13. Install the cowl panel grille.
14. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
15. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
16. Install the interior rear view mirror.
17. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
18. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
19. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 8287
Windshield: Service and Repair Glass Reseal - Windshield
Glass Reseal - Windshield
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
6. Remove the cowl panel grille.
7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
NOTE: Make sure there are no gaps in the urethane adhesive bead.
Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the
urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the cowl panel grille.
12. Position the front portion of the headliner.
13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield
Glass > Page 8288
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid
Onto Hood
Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto
Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8307
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8308
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8309
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8310
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8311
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8315
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8316
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8317
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8318
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8319
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
Washer Hose Repair
NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking,
a new washer hose must be installed.
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose.
3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8326
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump
Washer Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. NOTICE: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet.
Remove the washer pump.
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 8331
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if
available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer
pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
5. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak
Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8351
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8352
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8353
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8354
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8355
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position.
3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from
returning to the fully parked position.
If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them
to the correct locations.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 8360
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position.
3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct
location. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Windshield See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8363
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cowl panel grille.
2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield
wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. For additional information, refer to Wiper Motor - Windshield
See: Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper
Motor - Windshield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8364
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover.
2. Remove the pivot arm nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Remove the wiper pivot arm.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Rear See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair
Wiper Blade - Rear
Removal
NOTICE: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm
or the wiper arm heel.
NOTICE: Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass.
1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the
arm to its maximum angle.
2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and
wiper blade pivot joint.
3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the
blade from the arm.
Installation
1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 8372
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 8375
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed.
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft.
2. NOTICE: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm
is removed, the wiper arms may not
park in the correct location.
Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor.
- To install, tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 8378
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm Rear.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut.
- To install, manually finger-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Open the liftgate window.
5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel.
6. Remove the rear wiper motor.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. Remove the rear window wiper motor.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8382
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8384
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2009))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8385